Sony DVR DVW 2000P L User Manual
DDIGVITALWVIDE-OMCAS2SE0TTE0R0ECORDER  
DVW-M2000P  
DVW-2000  
DVW-2000P  
Note  
The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for the DVW-2000 series of  
digital videocassette recorders (English, Japanese, French and German versions).  
For more details, see page 1-5 “Using the CD-ROM Manual.”  
TM  
[English]  
OPERATION MANUAL  
1st Edition (Revised 2)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVERTISSEMENT: CET AVERTISSEMENT EST  
VALABLE POUR LES AUTRES PAYS.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies with both the  
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive  
(73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European  
Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
1. Utiliser un cordon d’alimentation approuvé (conducteur  
d’alimentation 3 âmes)/connecteur d’appareil/prise avec  
contacts de mise à la terre conforme aux règles de  
sécurité de chaque pays si applicable.  
2. Utiliser un cordon d’alimentation approuvé (conducteur  
d’alimentation 3 âmes)/connecteur d’appareil/prise  
conforme aux valeurs nominales (tension, ampérage)  
correctes.  
• EN60065: Product Safety  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment (s):  
S’adresser à un personnel de service qualifié pour toute  
question concernant l’emploi du cordon d’alimentation/  
connecteur d’appareil/prise ci-dessus.  
E1 (Residential), E2 (Commercial and light industrial), E3  
(Urban outdoors) and E4 (Controlled EMC environment ex.  
TV studio).  
WARNUNG: DIESE WARNUNG GILT FÜR ANDERE  
LÄNDER.  
Pour les clients européens  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la fois à la  
Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) (89/  
336/CEE) et à la Directive sur les basses tensions (73/23/  
CEE) émises par la Commission de la Communauté  
européenne.  
1. Verwenden Sie Netzkabel (dreiadrig), Geräteanschlüsse  
und Netzkabelstecker mit Masseleitung, die den  
Sicherheitsrichtlinien des jeweiligen Landes entspricht.  
2. Verwenden Sie Netzkabel (dreiadrig), Geräteanschlüsse  
und Netzkabelstecker mit Masseleitung, die den vor Ort  
herrschenden Spannungsanforderungen (Spannug,  
Stromstärke) entsprechen.  
La conformité à ces directives implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes:  
• EN60065: Sécurité des produits  
• EN55103-1: Interférences électromagnétiques (émission)  
• EN55103-2: Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les  
environnements électromagnétiques suivants:  
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère), E3  
(urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex.  
studio de télévision).  
Bei Frage über die Eignung und Sicherheit von Netzkabeln  
(dreiadrig), Geräteanschlüssen und Netzkabelsteckern  
wenden Sie sich bitte an einen qualifizierten  
Electrotechniker.  
CAUTION  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing  
and no objects filled with liquid, such as vases, shall be  
placed on the apparatus.  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die  
EMV-Direktive (89/336/EMG) der EG-Kommission als auch  
die Direktive Niederspannung (73/23/EMG).  
Angewandte Normen:  
• EN60065: Produktsicherheit  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störaussendung)  
ATTENTION  
Eviter d’exposer l’appareil à un égouttement ou à des  
éclaboussures et ne placer aucun objet rempli de liquide,  
comme un vase, sur l’appareil.  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störfestigkeit)  
für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen:  
E1 (Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem  
maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und  
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
ACHTUNG  
Das Gerät ist nicht tropf- und spritzwassersicher, daher  
dürfen keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllten Gegenstände, z. B.  
Vasen, darauf abgestellt werden.  
CAUTION  
The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source  
(mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if  
the unit itself has been turned off.  
ATTENTION  
Cet appareil n’est pas déconnecté de la source  
d’alimentation secteur tant qu’il est raccordé à la prise  
murale, même si l’appareil lui-même a été mis hors tension.  
ACHTUNG  
Solange das Netzkabel an eine Netzsteckdose  
angeschlossen ist, bleibt das Gerät auch im ausgeschalteten  
Zustand mit dem Strommetz verbunden.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1-1 Features ........................................................................................... 1-1  
1-2 Example System Configuration .................................................... 1-4  
1-3 Using the CD-ROM Manual.......................................................... 1-5  
1-3-1 CD-ROM System Requirements ............................................ 1-5  
1-3-2 Preparations............................................................................ 1-5  
1-3-3 Reading the CD-ROM Manual .............................................. 1-5  
Chapter 1  
Overview  
2-1 Control Panels................................................................................. 2-1  
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel............................................................... 2-2  
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel .............................................................. 2-3  
2-1-3 Switch Panel......................................................................... 2-14  
2-2 Connector Panel ........................................................................... 2-15  
Chapter 2  
Location and Function of  
Parts  
3-1 Connections to External Devices ................................................... 3-1  
3-1-1 Connections to Digital Devices.............................................. 3-1  
3-1-2 Connections to Analog Devices ............................................. 3-2  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System .............. 3-3  
3-2-1 External Sync Signal for the Internal Reference Video Signal  
Generator................................................................................ 3-3  
Chapter 3  
Preparations  
3-2-2 Reference Signal for the Servo System.................................. 3-4  
3-2-3 Connecting Reference Signals ............................................... 3-5  
3-3 Setup ................................................................................................ 3-7  
3-4 Superimposed Character Information ......................................... 3-8  
3-5 Cassettes ........................................................................................ 3-10  
3-5-1 Cassette Types ...................................................................... 3-10  
3-5-2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes .......................................... 3-10  
3-5-3 Preventing Accidental Erasure of Recordings...................... 3-11  
3-6 Using a Memory Stick .................................................................. 3-12  
3-6-1 Notes on Memory Stick ....................................................... 3-12  
4-1 Recording ........................................................................................ 4-1  
4-1-1 Preparations for Recording .................................................... 4-1  
4-1-2 Recording Time Code and User Bit Values............................ 4-2  
4-1-3 Recording Procedure.............................................................. 4-5  
4-2 Playback .......................................................................................... 4-6  
4-2-1 Preparations for Playback ...................................................... 4-6  
4-2-2 Playback Procedures .............................................................. 4-7  
4-2-3 Dynamic Motion Control (DMC) Playback......................... 4-11  
Chapter 4  
Recording and Playback  
5-1 Automatic Editing .......................................................................... 5-1  
5-1-1 Overview ................................................................................ 5-1  
5-1-2 Switch and Menu Settings...................................................... 5-2  
5-1-3 Selecting the Editing Mode .................................................... 5-3  
5-1-4 Setting Edit Points.................................................................. 5-3  
5-1-5 Modifying and Deleting Edit Points ...................................... 5-6  
5-1-6 Cue-Up to Edit Points and Preroll.......................................... 5-7  
5-1-7 Preview................................................................................... 5-7  
5-1-8 Carrying Out Automatic Editing ............................................ 5-8  
Chapter 5  
Editing  
(Continued)  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
5-2 DMC Editing................................................................................. 5-11  
5-2-1 Overview of DMC Editing ................................................... 5-11  
5-2-2 Carrying Out DMC Editing.................................................. 5-12  
5-3 Special Automatic Editing Methods ........................................... 5-13  
5-3-1 Quick Editing ....................................................................... 5-13  
5-3-2 Continuous Editing .............................................................. 5-13  
5-3-3 Standalone Editing ............................................................... 5-14  
5-3-4 Manual Editing..................................................................... 5-14  
5-3-5 Preread Editing..................................................................... 5-14  
Chapter 5  
Editing (Continued)  
6-1 Overview.......................................................................................... 6-1  
6-2 Shot Mark Operation Menu .......................................................... 6-2  
6-3 Shot Mark Operations ................................................................... 6-3  
6-3-1 Reading Shot Marks............................................................... 6-3  
6-3-2 Writing Shot Marks................................................................ 6-3  
6-3-3 Shot Mark List Operations ..................................................... 6-4  
6-3-4 Cueing Up to Shot Marks....................................................... 6-6  
6-3-5 Reading In Shot Data ............................................................. 6-7  
6-3-6 Sorting Shot Marks ................................................................ 6-8  
Chapter 6  
Shot Mark Function  
7-1 Overview of Tele-File Functions.................................................... 7-1  
7-2 Opening the Tele-File Menu .......................................................... 7-2  
7-3 Tele-File Menu ................................................................................ 7-3  
7-3-1 Clip Data Display................................................................... 7-3  
7-3-2 Preroll and Cue Up Using Clip Data...................................... 7-6  
7-3-3 Modifying Clip Data .............................................................. 7-7  
7-3-4 Undo/Resume Functions ...................................................... 7-10  
7-3-5 Displaying and Modifying Attribute Data ........................... 7-11  
Chapter 7  
Tele-File  
8-1 Overview of UMID Functions ....................................................... 8-1  
8-2 Recording UMIDs .......................................................................... 8-2  
8-3 UMID Output and Display ............................................................ 8-4  
8-3-1 UMID Output Settings ........................................................... 8-4  
8-3-2 UMID Display........................................................................ 8-4  
Chapter 8  
UMID Functions  
9-1 Overview of Essence Mark Functions .......................................... 9-1  
9-2 Essence Mark Recording and Output .......................................... 9-2  
9-2-1 Essence Mark Recording ....................................................... 9-2  
9-2-2 Essence Mark Output ............................................................. 9-2  
Chapter 9  
Essence Marks  
10-1 Overview of Auto Event Detector Functions............................ 10-1  
10-2 Event Output and Recording .................................................... 10-1  
Chapter 10  
Auto Event Detector  
2
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1 Overview of the Function Menu ............................................... 11-1  
11-1-1 Function Menu Configuration ........................................... 11-1  
11-1-2 Using the Function Menu .................................................. 11-2  
11-2 Function Menu Item List ........................................................... 11-3  
Chapter 11  
Function Menu  
12-1 Setup Menu Configuration ........................................................ 12-1  
12-2 Setup Menu Operations ............................................................. 12-2  
12-3 Items in the Basic Setup Menu.................................................. 12-5  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu........................................... 12-8  
Chapter 12  
Setup Menus  
13-1 Overview of Setup Utility Menu Functions.............................. 13-1  
Chapter 13  
Setup Utility Menu  
Functions  
13-1-1 Using Memory Stick Data ................................................. 13-1  
14-1 Removing a Cassette When Tape Slack Occurs ...................... 14-1  
14-2 Head Cleaning ............................................................................ 14-1  
14-3 Error Messages ........................................................................... 14-2  
14-4 Moisture Condensation .............................................................. 14-4  
14-5 Regular Checks........................................................................... 14-5  
14-5-1 Digital Hours Meter ........................................................... 14-5  
14-5-2 Maintenance Timings ........................................................ 14-6  
Chapter 14  
Maintenance and  
Inspection  
Specifications......................................................................................... A-1  
Index ....................................................................................................... I-1  
Appendix  
Table of Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
The DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P is a digital  
videocassette recorder based on the digital Betacam  
format.  
This unit uses large scale integrated circuits for signal  
processing, and has a simple internal construction,  
allowing it to provide functionality at least equivalent  
to a conventional VTR in a compact (4U size),  
lightweight, and low power consumption design.  
It not only offers recording and playback in digital  
Betacam format, but can also play back tapes recorded  
in Betacam SX format, analog Betacam format, or  
MPEG IMX format 1).  
Digital Betacam format  
The digital Betacam format is characterized in that the  
video and four-channel audio signals of each field are  
recorded onto the tape with six helical tracks, at a  
slightly slower tape speed and three times faster drum  
rotation speed than the analog Betacam formats:  
Betacam, and Betacam SP.  
As for longitudinal tracks, the digital Betacam format  
has a CTL track, a time code (LTC) track and a cue  
audio track, similarly to the analog Betacam formats.  
However, it does not have a channel-1 audio track, and  
this is a solution to expand the space for the helical  
tracks.  
Digital Betacam VTRs have a greater drum diameter  
than that of analog Betacam ones to ensure optimum  
digital recording, but their built-in time base corrector  
circuit enables them to play analog Betacam tapes  
(analog Betacam playback compatibility).  
Full erase head  
CTL head  
Betacam SP tape pattern  
Digital Betacam tape pattern  
Cue audio  
Channel-2 audio  
Channel-1 audio  
Video  
Channel-1 to  
Channel-4 audio  
Video  
Y track  
C track  
Time code  
CTL (control)  
Cue/time code erase head  
Audio/time code record/playback head  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) The DVW-2000/2000P does not support these three  
formats (Betacam SX, analog Betacam, MPEG IMX).  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
High-performance heads and compatibility  
playback function  
High quality four-channel audio  
High quality 20 bit/48 kHz digital audio is supported.  
There are four digital audio input/output channels, and  
four analog audio input/output channels.  
The newly developed high-performance heads and  
dynamic tracking (DT) technology provide high-  
density recording and playback in narrow tracks with  
high reliability. In addition to the digital Betacam  
recording and playback heads, this unit is also  
equipped with Betacam SX format playback heads,  
MPEG IMX playback heads, and analog Betacam DT  
heads, to provide compatibility playback functions,  
and allowing a wide variety of recorded resources to  
be used effectively.  
Newly developed multifunction control  
panel  
While a compact 4U size, this unit has a front panel  
which provides a wide range of functions while  
maintaining existing operability.  
Note that the compatibility playback functions differ  
depending on the models covered by this manual. 1)  
Basic operation buttons and jog/shuttle  
dial  
High-precision digital signal processing  
and range of interfaces  
The basic buttons and jog/shuttle dial for VTR and  
editing operations are provided in the conventional  
VTR layout, ensuring continuity with conventional  
operating panels.  
While supporting a wide range of input and output  
signals, all of the VTR internal processing is digital,  
providing high stability and reliability.  
The audio signals, similarly, are based on AES/EBU  
format, and are subjected to digital signal processing  
while still uncompressed.  
Time data display  
This can be selected to display a CTL counter value,  
time code value, or time code user bits. It can also  
display edit points and edit durations.  
The following interfaces are standard equipment, for  
ease of connection to different external devices.  
• Analog composite signal input/output  
• Analog component signal input/output  
Menu-based control interface  
• Analog audio signal input/output (4 channels)  
• SDI (Serial Digital Interface) SMPTE 259M input  
(component digital video/audio (4 channels))  
• SDI SMPTE 259M output (component digital video/  
audio (DVW-M2000/M2000P: 8 channels; DVW-  
2000/2000P: (4 channels))  
• AES/EBU serial digital audio input (4 channels)  
• AES/EBU serial digital audio output (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P: 8 channels; DVW-2000/2000P: 4 channels)  
• Time code input/output  
The time data/menu display shows not only various  
values and settings, but also the pages of a menu  
system for commonly used functions. You can use the  
function keys and MULTI CONTROL knob to easily  
change settings.  
Other operation settings, including interfacing with  
external devices, can be set from the control panel by  
the same type of setup menu system as on a  
conventional VTR.  
• Cue audio signal input/output  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) The DVW-2000/2000P is equipped with no Betacam SX  
playback heads, no analog Betacam DT playback heads,  
and no MPEG IMX playback heads.  
1-2  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High quality variable speed playback and  
digital jog sound function  
Cross-fade editing  
In audio editing, to avoid unnatural effects at edit  
points, you can fade the audio track. The setting allows  
you to select fade-in, fade-out, or cut-in.  
In digital Betacam or MPEG IMX format1) playback,  
the dedicated playback DT heads allow smooth,  
noiseless playback from –1 to +3 times normal speed.  
In analog Betacam compatible playback also, similar  
dedicated DT heads allow noiseless playback from –1  
to +3 times normal speed, and in Betacam SX format1)  
compatible playback, special multi-head playback  
technology allows noiseless playback from –1 to +2  
times normal speed.  
Tele-File functions  
Tele-File enables data writing/reading between  
cassettes with memory labels and VTRs. It increases  
the efficiency of operations such as recording,  
playback and editing, and source data management.  
In slow motion operation, the digital jog sound  
function provides the same ease of operation as a  
conventional analog VTR.  
Remote control function  
This unit can be controlled from an external remote  
controller or editor through an interface complying  
with RS-422A (serial 9-pin). Since two remote control  
connectors are provided, you can also control a  
number of VTRs simultaneously.  
Additionally, a parallel (50-pin) interface is also fitted  
as standard, supporting easy external control through  
the parallel interface.  
Wide range of editing functions  
By combining two units, you can carry out both  
assemble editing and insert editing automatically. All  
of the necessary editing functions are provided to set  
and amend edit points, to preview and review results  
of editing, and so on.  
DMC editing  
Rack mounting  
This allows automatic editing with a varying playback  
speed memorized beforehand for an edit segment.  
Using the optional RMM-131 Rack Mount Adaptor,  
you can mount the unit in a standard EIA 19-inch rack.  
For details of rack mounting, refer to the Installation  
Manual.  
Split editing  
In insert editing, this allows editing with the audio IN  
and OUT points to be displaced from the video edit  
points.  
Preread editing  
This allows you to play back prerecorded video and  
audio material, edit it by applying effects with an  
external device, and then rerecord in real time on the  
same tape.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) The MPEG IMX and Betacam SX formats are not  
supported by the DVW-2000/2000P.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1 Features  
1-2 Example System Configuration  
The following conceptual diagram shows an example  
of use.  
Microphone  
BVE-series editor  
Tape control  
Digital/analog cassette  
Audio/video  
server  
SDI  
system  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P  
Video monitor  
Analog composite  
Analog composite/component  
Analog audio  
SDI  
Audio monitor  
VTR with SDI connectors  
or analog VTR  
1-4  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3 Using the CD-ROM Manual  
The supplied CD-ROM includes operation manuals for  
the DVW-2000 series of digital videocassette recorders  
(English, Japanese, French, and German versions).  
1-3-3 Reading the CD-ROM  
Manual  
To read the operation manual contained on the CD-  
ROM disc, do the following.  
1-3-1 CD-ROM System  
Requirements  
1 Insert the CD-ROM disc in your CD-ROM drive.  
The following are required to access the supplied CD-  
ROM disc.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium CPU  
- Installed memory: 64 MB or more  
- CD-ROM drive: × 8 or faster  
A cover page appears automatically in your  
browser. If it does not appear automatically in the  
browser, double-click the index.htm file on the  
CD-ROM disc.  
• Monitor: Monitor supporting resolution of 800 × 600  
or higher  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows Millennium  
Edition, Windows 2000 Service Pack 2, Windows XP  
Professional or Windows XP Home Edition  
2 Select and click the operation manual that you  
want to read.  
This opens the PDF file of the operation manual.  
Note  
When these requirements are not met, access to the  
CD-ROM disc may be slow, or not possible at all.  
If you lose the CD-ROM disc or become unable to  
read its content, for example because of a hardware  
failure, you can do one of the following.  
You can purchase a new CD-ROM disc to replace one  
that has been lost or damaged. Contact your Sony  
service representative.  
1-3-2 Preparations  
One of the following programs must be installed on  
your computer in order to use the operation manuals  
contained on the CD-ROM disc.  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 or higher  
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Note  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it  
from the following URL:  
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/  
readstep2.html  
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
• Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel  
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and  
other countries.  
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of  
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or  
other countries.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1 Control Panels  
There are three control panels, as follows:  
• Upper control panel  
• Lower control panel  
• Switch panel  
Z
Upper control panel (see page 2-2)  
Lower control panel (see page 2-3)  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B PB OFF TC  
CONTROL PANEL  
Switch panel (access by opening the lower control panel) (see page 2-14)  
KEY INHI  
PANEL SEL  
ON OFF  
REAR FRONT  
Lower control panel unlock buttons  
Pushing in these buttons allows you to open the lower control panel.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
2-1 Control Panels  
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel  
1 POWER switch  
2 REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator  
3 EJECT button  
4 Format indicators  
Cassette compartment  
BETACAM/SP BETACAM SX  
MPEG IMX  
Digital BETACAM  
REMOTE  
POWER  
PHONES  
EJECT  
1(9P)  
2(50P) RS-232C  
Z
5 PHONES jack and control  
Note  
1 POWER switch  
Pressing the ‘ ) ’ side of the switch powers the unit on.  
When the unit is powered on, the audio setting display  
section (see page 2-5) and the time data/menu display  
section (see page 2-7) light.  
Ejecting with the EJECT button is a local operation. It  
is not possible to eject a cassette in another unit by  
remote control.  
4 Format indicators  
2 REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator  
Press one of these buttons to select the device  
controlling this unit.  
The BETACAM/SP, BETACAM SX, MPEG IMX, or  
Digital BETACAM indicator1) lights depending on the  
current recording or playback format.  
1(9P): This unit is controlled by the device connected  
to the REMOTE 1-IN(9P) or REMOTE 1-  
OUT(9P) connector. The button lights.  
The BETACAM/SP indicator lights when the format is  
Betacam or Betacam SP.  
2(50P): This unit is controlled by the device  
connected to the REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I/  
O(50P) connector. The button lights.  
RS-232C indicator: This indicator lights when this  
unit is controlled through the RS-232C connector.  
5 PHONES jack and control  
Connect stereo headphones with an impedance of  
8 ohms, to monitor the sound during recording,  
playback and editing.  
The control knob adjusts the volume.  
It is possible to set an internal board switch so that the  
output volume from the MONITOR OUTPUT L and R  
connectors is controlled simultaneously.  
3 EJECT button  
To eject the cassette, press this button. While the  
cassette is being ejected, this button lights.  
When using the lower control panel as remote control  
panel, press the DELETE button and STOP button at  
the same time to eject the cassette.  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) The BETACAM/SP, BETACAM SX, and MPEG IMX  
indicators do not exist on the DVW-2000/2000P.  
2-2  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel  
4 Time data/menu display section (see page 2-7)  
2 CHANNEL CONDITION  
5 MULTI CONTROL knob and SHIFT  
indicator (see page 2-6)  
indicator (see page 2-8)  
1 Audio control section  
6 RESET button (see page 2-8)  
3 Menu control buttons  
(see page 2-4)  
(see page 2-6)  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B PB OFF TC  
7 Search control section (see page 2-8)  
8 REC INHI indicator (see page 2-10)  
9 Tape transport control section (see page 2-10)  
qa ALARM indicator and KEY INHI  
indicator (see page 2-11)  
qs PLAYER button and RECORDER  
q; Editing mode setting  
button (see page 2-12)  
section (see page 2-11)  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B PB OFF TC  
qd Editing control section (see page 2-12)  
qf Shot mark section (see page 2-13)  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
2-1 Control Panels  
MIXING (mixing setting mode) button: Pressing  
this button puts the unit into mixing setting mode.  
In the audio setting display section, the MIX  
indicator flashes. In this state, you can use the  
audio signal selection buttons to specify which  
input channel signal will be recorded on which  
audio track on the tape.  
1 Audio control section  
1 Audio selection function selector buttons  
2 DISPLAY FULL/FINE button  
3 Audio setting display section  
4 Audio signal  
selection buttons  
Pressing this button again takes the unit out of  
mixing setting mode and puts it into monitor  
signal selection mode.  
On how to operate in input signal selection mode, mixing  
setting mode, and monitor signal selection mode, see the  
descriptions of the audio signal selection buttons on page  
2-5.  
2 DISPLAY FULL/FINE button  
Pressing this button toggles the display mode of the  
level meters in the audio setting display section  
between FULL and FINE.  
FULL: The display covers the range –60 dB to 0 dB  
or –40 dB to +20 dB as selected using setup menu  
item 806. In this mode the segment of the display  
corresponding to the current audio level and all  
lower segments light.  
FINE: The display is enlarged, with a step of  
0.25 dB. A segment indicating the reference level  
lights. In this mode only the segment of the  
display corresponding to the current audio level  
lights. If the audio level exceeds the maximum  
display level, the top segment flashes, and if the  
audio level goes below the minimum display  
level, the bottom segment flashes.  
6 PB controls  
5 REC controls  
In the audio control section, you can select and display  
input and output signals for audio channels.  
1 Audio selection function selector buttons  
INPUT (input signal selection mode) button:  
Pressing this button puts the unit into input signal  
selection mode. In the audio setting display  
section, indicators flash to indicate the currently  
selected signal for each channel (SDI, AES/EBU,  
or ANA). In this state, you can use the audio  
signal selection buttons to select the signal to  
input to each channel.  
You can select the following signals for audio  
input channels 1 to 4, respectively.  
• For input channel 1: SDI-1, SDI-5, AES/EBU-1,  
or ANALOG-1  
• For input channel 2: SDI-2, SDI-6, AES/EBU-2,  
or ANALOG-2  
• For input channel 3: SDI-3, SDI-7, AES/EBU-3,  
or ANALOG-3  
• For input channel 4: SDI-4, SDI-8, AES/EBU-4,  
or ANALOG-4  
Pressing this button again takes the unit out of  
input signal selection mode and puts it into  
monitor signal selection mode.  
2-4  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Audio setting display section  
Input channel indicator: Indicates the input channel  
from which audio signals are recorded on the  
audio track. Two numbers light to indicate that  
signals from the corresponding input channels are  
mixed for recording.  
Monitor channel L and R indicators: Indicate  
whether or not the signals of the track are output  
to the MONITOR OUTPUT L and R connectors  
or the PHONES jack. ‘L’ lights to indicate output  
to the left monitor channel, and ‘R’ lights to  
indicate output to the right monitor channel.  
EMPH (emphasis) indicator: While the unit is in  
recording or playback mode, this lights when the  
emphasis setting is on for the audio signal on the  
corresponding track.  
Input signal indicator  
SDI  
DATA indicator  
AES/EBU/ANA  
DATA 5 6 7 8  
Input channel  
indicator  
MIX 1 2 3 4  
MIX indicator  
dB OVER dB  
20  
0
-10  
-20  
OVER indicator  
2
10  
1
Level meter  
0
-1  
-10  
-20  
-2  
-30  
-40  
-40  
-60  
L
EMPH  
R
Monitor channel L  
and R indicators  
4 Audio signal selection buttons (CH1 to CH4,  
CUE)  
EMPH indicator  
The function of these buttons depends on the signal  
selection mode set with the audio selection function  
selector buttons (INPUT, MIXING) 1 as follows.  
Input signal selection mode (the input signal  
indicator flashes): The buttons in the upper row  
select signals for each audio input channel.  
Each time you press the CH1 (CH2, CH3, CH4)  
button, the selected signal cycles through SDI  
(channel 1 (2, 3, 4)) t SDI (channel 5 (6, 7, 8))  
t AES/EBU t ANA(analog) t SDI (channel 1  
(2, 3, 4))...  
Input signal indicator: Indicates the currently  
selected input signal (‘SDI’, ‘AES/EBU’, ‘ANA’  
for analog) for the corresponding audio input  
channel.  
DATA indicator: Lights when the corresponding  
audio track (audio channel on the tape) is put into  
data mode.  
For details of the data mode, refer to the Maintenance  
Manual Volume 1.  
MIX (mixing) indicator: Flashes when a mixing  
Press the INPUT button to confirm the input  
signal selections.  
setting operation is enabled for the corresponding  
audio track. The indicator showing the number of  
the selected input channel lights.  
Mixing setting mode (the MIX indicator flashes):  
The buttons in the lower row (REC row) select the  
tracks (audio channels on the tape) to contain the  
mixed signals. In the audio setting display section,  
the MIX indicator for the corresponding track  
flashes. The buttons in the upper row (EXT row)  
select the input channel signals to record on the  
corresponding track. By pressing two buttons at  
the same time, you can specify that the signals of  
two input channels be mixed for recording.  
For example, if you want to record the mixed  
signals of input channels 1 and 4 on track 3, press  
the CH3 button in the lower row (REC row), and  
then simultaneously press the CH1 and CH4  
buttons in the upper row (EXT row).  
OVER indicator: While the unit is in recording or  
playback mode, this lights when the level of the  
audio signal on the corresponding channel exceeds  
the maximum level that can be indicated on the  
level meter.  
Level meter: Displays the audio signal level when  
the unit is in recording, E-E1), or playback mode.  
You can use the setup menu to switch the display  
mode between PEAK.0 (0 dB is maximum level)  
and REF.0 (0 dB is the reference level). You can  
also use the DISPLAY FULL/FINE button 2 to  
enlarge the display only near the reference level.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) E-E mode: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric mode”.  
In this mode, video and audio signals input to the VTR  
are output after passing through internal electric circuits,  
but not through magnetic conversion circuits such as  
heads and tapes. This can be used to check input signals  
and for adjusting input signal levels.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
2-1 Control Panels  
Note  
6 PB (playback) controls  
These adjust individually the playback levels on  
channels 1 to 4 and cue audio.  
During playback, press to protrude the control knobs  
and adjust the level while monitoring the audio level  
indication on the level meters in the audio setting  
display section.  
When the control knobs are pushed in, the playback  
levels return to the preset levels, and cannot be  
adjusted.  
Before selecting signals from two input channels  
for recording in one recorder channel, check to be  
sure that the emphasis settings (ON or OFF) of the  
two input channels are the same. Recording and  
playback of mixed signals cannot be carried out  
correctly if the emphasis settings are different.  
For audio tracks with emphasis on, the EMPH  
indicator in the audio setting display section  
lights.  
On how to adjust the output levels of audio channel 5 to 8  
during IMX tape playback, see the description of setup menu  
item 826 (page 12-29)  
Monitor signal selection mode (the input signal  
indicator and the MIX indicator do not flash):  
The buttons in the upper and lower rows select  
tracks to be output to the MONITOR OUTPUT L  
and R connectors on the connector panel or the  
PHONES jack on the upper control panel. The  
buttons in the upper row (L row) select tracks for  
output to the MONITOR OUTPUT L connector,  
and the buttons on the lower row (R row) select  
tracks for output to the MONITOR OUTPUT R  
connector. You can obtain the mixed output of  
multiple tracks by simultaneously pressing  
multiple buttons in the upper or lower rows. For  
example, simultaneously press the CH1, CH2, and  
CH3 buttons in the upper row to mix the signals of  
audio tracks 1, 2, and 3 for output to the  
2 CHANNEL CONDITION indicator  
A three-color indicator shows the state of the playback  
signal.  
Green: The state of the playback signal is good.  
Yellow: The playback signal is somewhat  
deteriorated, but playback is possible.  
Red: The playback signal is deteriorated.  
When this indicator remains on, head cleaning or  
an internal inspection is necessary.  
MONITOR OUTPUT L connector.  
3 Menu control buttons  
To monitor channels 5 to 8 in MPEG IMX  
playback, press the CUE button to switch between  
CH1 to CH4 and CH5 to CH8, and then select the  
desired channels.  
These buttons are used for function menu (see the  
following section “Overview of the function menu”)  
and setup menu (see Chapter 12) operations. The page  
buttons (V, v, and HOME) select menu pages, and the  
function buttons (F1 to F6) make function settings.  
V: Selects the next page in the order HOME t 1 t  
2 t 3 t 4 t 5 t HOME.  
v: Selects the next page in the order HOME t 5 t  
4 t 3 t 2 t 1 t HOME.  
When there are setup menu definitions on page 6,  
page 6 is displayed between page 5 and the HOME  
page.  
HOME: Selects the function menu HOME page.  
When at least one user-defined function key is set  
in the HOME2 page, pressing the HOME button  
toggles the menu page display between HOME  
and HOME2.  
5 REC (recording) controls  
These individually adjust the recording levels on  
channels 1 to 4 and cue audio.  
To set the recording level, put the unit into E-E mode,  
press to protrude the control knobs and adjust the level  
while watching the level meters.  
When the control knobs are pushed in, the recording  
levels return to the preset levels and cannot be  
adjusted.  
For details about selecting the E-E mode, see the  
description of the REC button in the tape transport control  
section (see page 2-10) and function menu HOME page (see  
page 11-3).  
F1 to F6: Make settings for the items displayed in the  
upper line of the menu display (the menu item  
display line). Pressing one of these buttons  
changes the setting for the corresponding item and  
displays the setting in the lower line of the menu  
display.  
2-6  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If there is no setting displayed in the lower line of  
the menu display, even though a menu item is  
displayed in the upper line, pressing the  
corresponding function button moves to a lower  
menu level.  
Time data display area 1  
Normally this displays a CTL count, time code value,  
or user bit value according to the setting in function  
menu HOME page for F4 (CTL/TC).  
Time data type indicator  
This indicates the type of data displayed in the time  
data display area 1.  
LTC (longitudinal time code): Time code recorded  
on a longitudinal track on the tape  
LUB: LTC user bit values  
Overview of the function menu  
The function menu provides convenient access to  
frequently used function settings, such as input video  
signal selection and time code settings.  
For details on the function menu, see Chapter 11.  
4 Time data/menu display section  
1 Time data display  
VITC (vertical interval time code): Time code  
recorded in the vertical blanking interval  
VIUB: VITC user bit value  
DF (drop-frame) indicator (525-line mode only)  
This lights when values of drop-frame mode time code  
are displayed.  
VIUB DF LTC VITC 2F  
CONFI ON  
DOLBY NR  
REM: 01: 23 : 45 78. 9%  
59.94  
DB 525  
LTC indicator  
01:23:45:06  
Regardless of the display in time data display  
area 1, this indicator lights when LTC values are being  
read or recorded.  
1
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TC MENU TCGSET  
PB  
Y-R,B  
OFF  
TC  
2 Menu display  
VITC indicator  
Regardless of the display in time data display  
area 1, this indicator lights when VITC values are  
being read or recorded.  
2 Time data display  
This displays indicators relating to time data and other  
indicators.  
Capstan lock mode indicator  
This indicates the capstan lock mode (2F, 4F, or 8F)  
set in function menu page 4 or in setup menu item 106.  
Time data display area 1  
Time data type indicator  
DF indicator  
Playback format indicator  
This indicator shows the current playback format.  
DB: Digital Betacam format  
IMX: MPEG IMX format, bit rate 50 Mbps, 8 audio  
channels/16 bits  
IMX4: MPEG IMX format, bit rate 50 Mbps, 4 audio  
channels/24 bits  
SX: Betacam SX format  
LTC indicator  
VITC indicator  
Capstan lock mode indicator  
Playback format indicator  
System frequency indicator  
525/625 indicator  
SP: Betacam SP format  
No display: Betacam format  
CONFI (ON)/PREREAD  
indicators  
VIUB DF LTC VITC 2F  
CONFI ON  
DOLBY NR  
System frequency indicator  
Displays the current playback field frequency.  
01:23:45:06  
Speed indication area  
DOLBY NR indicator  
525/625 indicator  
This indicator shows the number of scan lines for the  
television standard (525 (NTSC) or 625 (PAL))  
selected using setup menu item 013.  
Time data display area 2  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
2-1 Control Panels  
CONFI (ON)/PREREAD indicators  
2 Menu display  
These indicate the state of the VTR CONFI playback 1)  
function. When the CONFI playback function is  
enabled by the setting in function menu HOME page,  
the CONFI indicator appears, and when CONFI  
playback is actually being carried out the ON indicator  
also appears.  
When F6 (PREREAD) is set to ON in function menu  
page 4, the CONFI playback function is disabled and  
one of the following is displayed.  
This displays the function menu and setup menu.  
For details on the function menu, see Chapter 11 and for  
details on the setup menu, see Chapter 12.  
5 MULTI CONTROL knob and SHIFT  
indicator  
In function menu operations, rotate the MULTI  
CONTROL knob to change settings that flash in the  
menu display section. In setup menu operations, rotate  
this knob to select menu items.  
PREREAD: Preread of both audio and video  
A-PREAD: Preread of both audio only  
V-PREAD: Preread of video only  
The SHIFT indicator lights when you press this knob  
in. In this state, the value of the setting changes by a  
greater amount when you rotate the knob.  
Time data display area 2  
Displays data types and time data such as the time  
code of edit points and the total time of that tape.  
The following data types are shown.  
TOTL: Time value representing the total tape length.  
REM: Time value representing the remaining tape  
length.  
Either TOTL or REM appears depending on the  
function menu page 3 setting for F5 (T INFO).  
The values displayed are approximate values  
calculated on the basis of the detected tape diameter.  
They are not precise to units of seconds.  
6 RESET button  
To reset a CTL, time code (TC) or user bit (UB) value  
displayed in time data display area 1, hold this button  
down.  
Resetting the CTL value erases all edit points.  
7 Search control section  
BOT: Returned to top of tape.  
EOT: Reached end of tape.  
IN: video IN point  
1 SHUTTLE button  
OUT: video OUT point  
2 JOG button  
AIN: audio IN point  
AOUT: audio OUT point  
DUR: duration value  
TCG (time code generator): time code generated by  
the internal time code generator  
3 VAR button  
SHUTTLE/VAR  
RECORDER  
JOG  
4 SHUTTLE/VAR  
JOG  
and JOG  
indicators  
DOLBY NR indicator  
This lights when the Dolby noise-reduction2) circuit is  
functioning.  
5 Search dial  
Speed indication area  
This indicates the speed of a DMC playback.  
During a DMC playback, “DMC SPD” is displayed in  
time data display area 2.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) CONFI playback: This refers to playback of the audio  
and video signals immediately after recording, using the  
confidence heads, the signal being output to all intents  
and purposes simultaneously with recording. This is used  
to check recording.  
2) Dolby noise reduction: Dolby noise reduction  
manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double-D  
symbol ; are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation.  
2-8  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 SHUTTLE button  
Playback modes using the search dial  
To use the search dial for playback in shuttle mode,  
press this button, turning it on.  
Playback mode  
Operations and functions  
Press the SHUTTLE button or the  
search dial so that the SHUTTLE  
button lights, then turn the search dial.  
Playback is carried out at a speed  
determined by the position of the  
search dial. The playback speed  
range is as follows:  
Shuttle  
For details of playback in shuttle mode, see the description  
of the search dial 5.  
2 JOG button  
To use the search dial for playback in jog mode, press  
this button, turning it on.  
• Using a Digital Betacam tape: –50 to  
+50 times normal speed  
• Using an MPEG IMX tape: –78 to  
+78 times normal speed  
For details of playback in jog mode, see the description of  
the search dial 5.  
• Using a Betacam SX tape: –78 to  
+78 times normal speed  
• Using an analog Betacam tape: –35  
to +35 times normal speed for 525/  
60 mode or –42 to +42 times normal  
speed for 625/50 mode  
3 VAR (variable) button  
To use the search dial for playback in variable speed  
mode, press this button, turning it on.  
The search dial has detents at the still  
position and at 5 times normal  
speed.  
For details of playback in variable speed mode, see the  
description of the search dial 5.  
The maximum shuttle mode playback  
speed can be changed by changing  
the setting of setup menu item 102  
(see page 12-8).  
4 SHUTTLE/VAR and JOG indicators  
Either of the indicators is lit to show the current search  
mode or the mode used last. When the unit is turned  
on, the SHUTTLE/VAR indicator lights.  
When the SHUTTLE/VAR indicator is lit: Shuttle  
or variable speed mode  
Jog  
Press the JOG button or the search  
dial so that the JOG button lights, then  
turn the search dial. Playback is  
carried out at a speed determined by  
the speed of rotation of the search  
dial. The playback speed range is –1  
to +1 time normal speed.  
When the JOG indicator is lit: Jog mode  
5 Search dial  
The search dial has no detents.  
Turn this to carry out playback in the modes shown in  
the following table. Turning the dial clockwise lights  
the H indicator and plays back in the forward  
direction. Turning the dial counterclockwise lights the  
h indicator and plays back in the reverse direction.  
When the tape is stopped or the unit is turned on, the  
s indicator lights. Pressing the dial toggles between  
shuttle and jog modes or between variable speed and  
jog modes.  
Variable speed  
Press the VAR button, turning it on,  
then turn the search dial. You can  
control the playback speed finely (a  
maximum of 51 steps) in the range in  
which noiseless playback is possible.  
The search dial has detents at the still  
position and at the normal speed  
position.  
Capstan override  
For details on operation, see page  
4-9.  
You can carry out noiseless playback in the following  
speed ranges depending on the tape format.  
Digital Betacam: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
MPEG IMX: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
Betacam SX: –1 to +2 times normal speed  
Betacam/Betacam SP: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
Setting setup menu item 101 (see page 12-8) to KEY enables  
you to use only the SHUTTLE, JOG, and VAR buttons to  
select shuttle/jog/variable speed modes.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
2-1 Control Panels  
Cuing up edit points  
8 REC INHI (recording inhibit) indicator  
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT  
button while pressing this button to cue up to the  
corresponding edit point.  
This indicator is on or off according to the  
combination of the F5 (RECINH) setting on function  
menu page 4 and the record inhibit plug on the  
cassette, as shown in the following table. When this  
indicator is on, recording on tape is prohibited.  
2 REC (record) button  
To start recording, press this button together with the  
PLAY button, turning it on.  
REC INHI indicator indications  
Monitoring in E-E mode  
State of the record  
inhibit plug on the  
cassette  
REC INHI  
indicator state  
RECINH setting  
When the unit is in stop mode, pressing the REC  
button causes it to light and allows you to monitor the  
video and audio in E-E mode. To return to the original  
state, press the STOP button.  
ON  
Record inhibit/permit  
Record inhibit  
Lit  
Lita)  
OFF  
During playback, search, fast forward, or rewind,  
while the REC button is held down you can monitor  
the video and audio in E-E mode. In this case the  
button does not light.  
Record permit  
Off  
a) It is possible to make a setting (setup menu item 107) so  
that in this case the indicator flashes.  
9 Tape transport control section  
3 EDIT button  
To carry out manual editing, press this button  
simultaneously with the PLAY button.  
1 PREROLL button  
2 REC button  
Monitoring in E-E mode  
REC  
3 EDIT button  
When the unit is in stop mode, pressing the EDIT  
button causes it to light and allows you to monitor the  
input signal selected with the ASSEMBLE button or  
INSERT buttons in E-E mode. To return to the original  
state, press the STOP button.  
PREROLL  
REW  
EDIT  
STANDBY  
STOP  
4 STANDBY button  
F FWD  
PLAY  
5 STOP button  
During playback, search, fast forward, or rewind,  
while the EDIT button is held down you can monitor  
the video and audio input signals in E-E mode.  
6 F FWD button  
7 PLAY button  
8 SERVO indicator  
9 REW button  
4 STANDBY button  
When a cassette is inserted and this button is off, to put  
the unit in standby mode, press the button, turning it  
on.  
In standby mode, the drum is rotating and the tape is in  
contact with the drum. As a result, recording or  
playback can start immediately.  
1 PREROLL button  
Press this button to cue up to the preroll point (before  
the IN point by the time set as the preroll time) on the  
tape. You can change or select the preroll time and the  
state of the unit at the end of preroll (“stop mode” 1) or  
(still playback mode) using setup menu item 001 or  
401.  
To end standby mode, press the STANDBY button,  
turning it off.  
If 8 minutes (value can be varied using setup menu  
item 501) elapse in standby mode, the unit  
automatically switches out of standby mode to protect  
the tape.  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1) Stop mode: The state in which the device currently the  
subject of operation is stopped, and the STOP button is  
lit.  
2-10  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 STOP button  
1 ASSEMBLE button  
To stop recording or playback, press this button,  
turning it on.  
Press this button, turning it on, to carry out assemble  
editing1).  
When you stop playback, the unit switches either to  
still playback or to E-E mode according to the setting  
on function menu HOME page for F2 (PB/EE) and the  
setting of setup menu item 108.  
All signals (video signals, audio signals, time code  
signals, and so on) are recorded together.  
Press the button again, turning it off, to exit from  
assemble editing mode.  
Note  
Fault display function  
When even one of the INSERT buttons is lit, the  
ASSEMBLE button does not work. To use the  
ASSEMBLE button, turn off all the lit INSERT  
buttons.  
The STOP button flashes in the following cases related  
to reference signals:  
• When F2 (OUTREF) is set to INPUT on function  
menu page 4, and there is no input video signal.  
• When F2 (OUTREF) is set to REF in function menu  
page 4, and there is no external reference signal input  
or the input external reference signal is not  
synchronized to the input video signal.  
2 INSERT buttons  
Press the corresponding button, turning it on, to select  
a signal for insert editing2). Press the button again,  
turning it off, to cancel the selection.  
VIDEO button: Selects the video signal.  
TC (time code) button: Selects time code.  
CH1 to CH4 (audio channels 1 to 4) buttons:  
Select the signals on audio channels 1 to 4.  
CUE button: Selects the cue audio signal.  
6 F FWD (fast forward) button  
To fast forward the tape, press this button, turning it  
on.  
7 PLAY button  
To start playback, press this button, turning it on.  
Note  
When the ASSEMBLE button is lit, none of the  
INSERT buttons work. To use INSERT buttons, press  
the ASSEMBLE button, turning it off.  
To operate in capstan override mode  
Hold down this button, and turn the search dial.  
For details of capstan override mode, see page 4-9.  
qa ALARM indicator and KEY INHI  
indicator  
8 SERVO indicator  
Lights when the drum servo and capstan servo are  
locked.  
ALARM indicator  
This lights when a hardware error is detected on the  
unit, and goes off when the error is resolved.  
When this indicator is lit, an error message appears in  
the time data/menu display section. If you are using  
the SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) or COMPOSITE  
VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector, then when  
the setting of F4 (CHARA) in function menu page 4 is  
ON, the error message also appears on the monitor  
screen.  
9 REW (rewind) button  
To rewind the tape, press this button, turning it on.  
q; Editing mode setting section  
1 ASSEMBLE button  
ASSEMBLE  
INSERT  
VIDEO  
TC  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CUE  
For details on error messages, refer to Section 1-24 in the  
Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
2 INSERT buttons  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
2) Insert editing: Editing in which new video/audio is added  
to an intermediate position of existing recorded video/  
audio.  
1) Assemble editing: Editing in which new video/audio is  
added in sequence to the end of existing recorded video/  
audio.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
2-1 Control Panels  
KEY INHI (inhibit) indicator  
2 MEMORY indicator  
This indicator lights when the KEY INHIBIT switch  
on the switch panel (see page 2-14) is set to ON.  
When memorizing the playback speed using the DMC  
EDIT button, this indicator flashes as the playback  
speed is captured to memory, and lights continuously  
once the speed is captured.  
qs PLAYER button and RECORDER  
button  
3 DELETE button  
This deletes an existing edit point.  
When you carry out editing using a VTR connected to  
the REMOTE 1-IN(9P) or REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
connector (see page 2-18) as the player and this unit as  
the recorder, these buttons select which VTR the  
editing control buttons and tape transport buttons on  
this unit control.  
Hold down this button and press the IN, OUT, AUDIO  
IN, or AUDIO OUT button which is lit, indicating an  
existing edit point, to delete the corresponding edit  
point. The button either goes off or flashes. When the  
button flashes, it is necessary to set the deleted edit  
point again.  
PLAYER: The editing control buttons and tape  
transport buttons on this unit control the external  
player VTR.  
To cancel the DMC mode, hold down the DMC EDIT  
button and press the DELETE button.  
RECORDER: The editing control buttons and tape  
transport buttons on this unit control the recorder,  
that is to say, this unit.  
4 TRIM buttons  
Use these buttons to trim an edit point to single-frame  
precision.  
Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT  
button, and press one of these buttons. The ‘+’ button  
advances the corresponding edit point by one frame,  
and the ‘–’ button sets it back by one frame.  
Pressing one of these buttons while holding down the  
PLAY button adjusts the tape speed by +8% or –8%  
correspondingly. (Capstan override function)  
When this unit is being used in standalone mode,  
neither button functions.  
qd Editing control section  
1 DMC EDIT button  
5 Edit point setting buttons  
2 MEMORY indicator  
IN button and OUT button: To set a video IN point  
or OUT point, hold down the IN button or OUT  
button, and press the ENTRY button.  
3 DELETE button  
4 TRIM buttons  
After you have made the setting, pressing the IN  
button or OUT button displays the video IN point  
or video OUT point set in time data display area 2.  
AUDIO IN button and AUDIO OUT button: In  
insert editing, to set an audio IN point or audio  
OUT point separate from the corresponding video  
edit point, hold down the AUDIO IN button or  
AUDIO OUT button, and press the ENTRY  
button.  
5 Edit point setting buttons  
TRIM  
AUDIO  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
DMC EDIT  
DELETE  
ENTRY  
MEMORY  
PREVIEW  
AUTO EDIT  
REVIEW  
OUT  
After you have made the setting, pressing the  
AUDIO IN button or AUDIO OUT button  
displays the audio IN point or audio OUT point set  
in time data display area 2.  
6 PREVIEW button  
7 AUTO EDIT button  
8 REVIEW button  
1 DMC EDIT button  
To carry out recording of playback at any speed  
between –1 and +3 times normal (between –1 and +2  
times normal for Betacam SX), automatic playback,  
and automatic editing.  
2-12  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENTRY button: Use this for setting edit points and  
so on.  
3 MARK button  
Hold this button down for 2 seconds or more, to enable  
writing, amending, and deleting of shot marks.  
• To set a video IN point or OUT point: Hold  
down the IN button or OUT button, and press  
this button.  
• To set an audio IN point or OUT point: Hold  
down the AUDIO IN button or AUDIO OUT  
button, and press this button.  
6 REVIEW button  
Use this button to review the editing results after  
carrying out automatic editing.  
7 AUTO (automatic) EDIT button  
After edit point setting, to carry out automatic editing  
(recording), press this button, turning it on.  
If the IN point is not set, the automatic editing is  
carried out with the point where you pressed this  
button as the IN point.  
If you pressed the PREVIEW button to carry out a  
preview, when the preview ends this button flashes.  
8 PREVIEW button  
After edit point setting, to preview the editing results  
on the monitor before recording, press this button,  
turning it on.  
If the IN point is not set, the preview is carried out  
with the point where you pressed this button as the IN  
point.  
During the preview it is lit, and when the preview ends  
it flashes.  
qf Shot mark section  
1 LIST button  
2 REC/ERASE indicator  
LIST GOOD SHOT MARK  
REC/  
ERASE  
3 MARK button  
1 LIST button  
Use this button to read in and list shot marks.  
2 REC/ERASE indicator  
This lights in the state in which writing, amending, and  
deleting of shot marks is enabled and flashes while a  
shot mark is actually being written, amended or  
deleted.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
2-1 Control Panels  
2-1-3 Switch Panel  
On how to open the lower control panel, see the figure on  
page 2-1.  
To access the switch panel, open the lower control panel.  
CONTROL PANEL  
KEY INHI  
PANEL SEL  
OFF  
REAR FRONT  
ON  
4 CONTROL PANEL connector  
3 PANEL SELECT switch  
2 KEY INHIBIT switch  
1 Memory stick slot  
1 Memory stick slot  
Use this to update the firmware. You can also save or  
load setup menu settings onto the Memory Stick.  
REAR: Enables the control panel connected to the  
CONTROL PANEL connector on the connector  
panel. When setup menu item 117 is set to PARA,  
this switch position also enables the control panel  
connected to the CONTROL PANEL connector  
on the switch panel.  
Note  
After inserting a Memory Stick, allow at least five  
seconds to elapse before removing it.  
4 CONTROL PANEL connector (10-pin, round  
type)  
Plug in the lower control panel connection cable.  
For details on firmware update and save or load setup menu  
settings, see Section 13-1 “Overview of Setup Utility Menu  
Functions” and refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
2 KEY INHIBIT switch  
Moving this switch to the ON position disables the  
controls on the upper and lower control panels.  
You can specify which buttons and knobs are disabled  
in setup menu item 118.  
3 PANEL SELECT switch  
In addition to the lower control panel, you can connect  
a similar control panel to this unit. When two control  
panels are connected to the unit, the PANEL SELECT  
switch is used to specify which panel be enabled to  
control the unit.  
FRONT: Enables the control panel connected to the  
CONTROL PANEL connector on the switch  
panel.  
2-14  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2 Connector Panel  
2 Analog video input/output section (see page 2-16)  
3 Digital audio input/output section (see page 2-16)  
Cooling fan  
1 Analog audio input/output  
section  
75Ω  
75Ω  
4 Digital signal input/  
output section (see  
page 2-17)  
Cooling fan  
5 Power supply section  
(see page 2-17)  
7 Time code input/output  
section (see page 2-18)  
6 External device connectors (see page 2-17)  
8 Audio monitor signal output section  
(see page 2-18)  
2 AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 (channels 1 to 4)  
and CUE IN LEVEL switches  
1 Analog audio input/output section  
Set these for each channel as shown in the following  
table, according to the audio/cue input level to the  
AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 and CUE IN connectors  
and the impedance.  
1 AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors  
2 AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 and CUE  
IN LEVEL switches  
AUDIO INPUT  
CH3  
CUE  
CH1  
CH2  
CH4  
IN  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
HIGH LOW  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 and  
CUE IN LEVEL switch settings  
LOW  
OFF  
HIGH LOW  
HIGH LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
OFF  
HIGH  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
600Ω  
600Ω  
600Ω  
600Ω  
600Ω  
Audio/cue input level and impedance Switch setting  
Level  
Impedance  
–60 dBu  
High impedance LOW-OFF  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
CH3  
CUE  
(microphone input) (approx. 20 kΩ) (left position)  
CH1  
CH2  
CH4  
OUT  
+4 dBu  
(line audio input)  
High impedance HIGH-OFF  
(approx. 20 kΩ) (center position)  
+4 dBm  
(line audio input)  
600 Ω  
HIGH-ON 600 Ω  
(right position)  
4 CUE IN/OUT connectors  
3 AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to  
CH4 connectors  
3 AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to CH4 (channels 1 to 4)  
connectors (XLR 3-pin, male)  
These connectors output analog audio signals for  
channels 1 to 4.  
1 AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 (channels 1 to 4)  
connectors (XLR 3-pin, female)  
Input analog audio signals to channels 1 to 4.  
You can record analog audio signals input to these  
connectors to any audio track on the tape.  
4 CUE IN/OUT(cue audio input/output)  
connectors (XLR 3-pin, female/male)  
The IN connector inputs and the OUT connector  
outputs the analog cue audio signals.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
2-2 Connector Panel  
5 COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT connectors  
(BNC type)  
2 Analog video input/output section  
These connectors output analog composite video  
signals.  
1 REF.VIDEO INPUT connectors and 75 Ω termination switch  
When the setting of F4 (CHARA) in function menu  
page 4 is ON, connector 3 (SUPER) outputs a signal  
with superimposed time code, menu settings, alarm  
messages, and other text information.  
2 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors  
and 75 Ω termination switch  
VIDEO INPUT  
REF.VIDEO COMPOSITE COMPONENT  
OFF  
ON OFF  
75  
ON  
75  
Y
3 Digital audio input/output section  
R-Y  
3 COMPONENT VIDEO  
INPUT connectors  
1 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors  
B-Y  
AUDIO INPUT(AES/EBU)  
CH1/2  
CH3/4  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE COMPONENT  
1
Y
AUDIO OUTPUT(AES/EBU)  
CH1/2 CH3/4 CH5/6  
CH7/8  
2
R-Y  
B-Y  
4 COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUTPUT connectors  
3
(SUPER)  
2 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) connectors  
5 COMPOSITE VIDEO  
OUTPUT connectors  
1 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors (BNC  
type)  
1 REF. (reference) VIDEO INPUT connectors  
(BNC type) and 75 Ω termination switch  
Input a reference video signal. Input a video signal  
with chroma burst (VBS) or a monochrome video  
signal (VS). When using the loop-through connection  
set the switch to the OFF position, and otherwise to the  
ON position.  
Input up to two sets (4 channels: channels 1/2 and 3/4)  
of AES/EBU format digital audio signals.  
2 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) connectors (BNC  
type)  
These connectors output up to four sets (8 channels:  
channels 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8) of AES/EBU format  
digital audio signals. Note that if your unit is a DVW-  
2000/2000P, AES/EBU digital audio outputs are  
limited to two sets (4 channels: channels 1/2 and 3/4).  
2 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors (BNC  
type) and 75 Ω termination switch  
Input analog composite video signals.  
When using the loop-through connection set the switch  
to the OFF position, and otherwise to the ON position.  
3 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT connectors  
(BNC type)  
Input analog component video signals (Y/R–Y/B–Y).  
4 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT connectors  
(BNC type)  
These connectors output analog component video  
signals (Y/R–Y/B–Y).  
2-16  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Digital signal input/output section  
5 Power supply section  
SDI  
INPUT  
1 AC IN connector  
1 SDI INPUT connectors  
2 Ground terminal  
SDI  
OUTPUT  
1
1 AC IN connector  
Use a power cord to connect this to an AC outlet.  
2
2 Ground terminal  
2 SDI OUTPUT connectors  
Connect this to ground.  
3(SUPER  
)
6 External device connectors  
REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I/O(50P)  
1 SDI (Serial Digital Interface) INPUT connectors  
(BNC type)  
1 REMOTE 2 PARALLEL  
I/O(50P) connector  
Input D1 format digital video/audio signals. Of the two  
connectors, the upper one is for input, and the lower  
one is for an active-through connection.  
CONTROL PANEL  
VIDEO CONTROL  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
2 CONTROL PANEL  
connector  
REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
RS232C  
3 VIDEO CONTROL  
2 SDI (Serial Digital Interface) OUTPUT  
connectors (BNC type)  
These connectors output D1 format digital video/audio  
signals.  
connector  
4 OPTION connector  
(OPTION)  
5 REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
When the setting of F4 (CHARA) in function menu  
page 4 is ON, connector 3 (SUPER) outputs a signal  
with superimposed time code, menu settings, alarm  
messages, and other text information.  
connector  
6 REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
connector  
7 RS-232C connector  
1 REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector  
(D-sub 50-pin)  
Connect remote control signals from an external  
device.  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-17  
2-2 Connector Panel  
2 CONTROL PANEL connector (round type, 10-  
pin)  
7 Time code input/output section  
In addition to the lower control panel, a similar control  
panel can be connected to this unit. To connect such a  
second control panel, use this connector. When two  
control panels are connected, use the PANEL SELECT  
switch on the switch panel (see page 2-14) to specify  
which control panel will control this unit.  
1 TIME CODE IN connector  
TIME CODE  
IN  
OUT  
2 TIME CODE OUT connector  
3 VIDEO CONTROL connector (D-sub 15-pin)  
For remote control of the internal digital video  
processor, connect an optional BVR-50/50P Remote  
Control Unit.  
Always power off this unit before connecting the  
remote control unit.  
1 TIME CODE IN connector (XLR 3-pin, female)  
To record time code from an external device, input a  
time code signal from the time code output connector  
of the other device.  
4 OPTION connector (D-sub 9-pin)  
Not used.  
2 TIME CODE OUT connector (XLR 3-pin, male)  
This outputs a time code according to the operating  
state of the unit, as follows:  
5 REMOTE 1-IN(9P) connector (D-sub 9-pin)  
When using this unit together with another DVW-  
M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P or an MPEG IMX, D-1,  
D-2, or Betacam VTR, and a BVE-series BVE-900/  
910/2000/9000/9000P/9100/9100P or other editor,  
connect the optional 9-pin remote control cable from  
the other unit to this connector.  
• During playback: the playback time code  
By setting setup menu item 606, you can also output  
the time code from the internal time code generator  
locked to the playback time code.  
• During recording: the time code generated by the  
internal time code generator or the time code input to  
the TIME CODE IN connector.  
Depending on the setting of setup menu item 211, you  
can use this connector alone, or in a loop-through  
configuration with the REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
connector.  
8 Audio monitor signal output section  
1 MONITOR OUTPUT R  
connector  
6 REMOTE 1-OUT(9P) connector (D-sub 9-pin)  
This provides the loop-through output for remote  
control signals from the REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
connector.  
MONITOR OUTPUT  
R
L
2 MONITOR OUTPUT L  
connector  
Depending on the setting of setup menu item 211, you  
can use this connector alone, or in a loop-through  
configuration with the REMOTE 1-IN(9P) connector.  
1 MONITOR OUTPUT R connector (XLR 3-pin,  
male)  
7 RS-232C connector (D-sub 9-pin)  
Use this for monitoring and diagnosis of the state of  
this unit from an external computer, using ISR  
(Interactive Status Reporting).  
This outputs the audio signals whose output  
destination was set to ‘R’ with the audio signal  
selection buttons in the audio control section. If  
multiple tracks have been set to ‘R’, the signals of  
those tracks are mixed for output.  
2 MONITOR OUTPUT L connector (XLR 3-pin,  
male)  
This outputs the audio signals whose output  
destination was set to ‘L’ with the audio signal  
selection buttons in the audio control section. If  
multiple tracks have been set to ‘L’, the signals of  
those tracks are mixed for output.  
2-18  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 Connections to External Devices  
3-1-1 Connections to Digital Devices  
This unit can input serial digital signals (video and  
audio) from another digital VTR such as the MSW-  
A2000/A2000P/M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P and  
DVW-A500/A500P/500/500P. The following example  
shows the connections with a MSW-A2000/A2000P/  
M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P unit as a player, with this  
unit used as recorder.  
Reference signal  
75 Ω termination  
switch: OFF  
REF. VIDEO INPUT  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P)  
MSW-A2000/A2000P/M2000/  
M2000P/2000/2000P (player)  
SDI OUTPUT 3  
75 Ω termination  
switch: ON  
REF. VIDEO INPUT  
SDI INPUT  
REMOTE 1-OUT(9P)  
75Ω  
75Ω  
SDI OUTPUT 3  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P (recorder)  
BVM-1454 series video  
monitor  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1 Connections to External Devices  
3-1-2 Connections to Analog Devices  
The following example shows the connections with an  
analog VTR (a Betacam SP VTR, D2 VTR, 1-inch  
VTR, etc.) for recording analog audio and video  
signals.  
Video monitor  
75 Ω termination switch:  
Set to OFF when using an analog  
composite video signal bridge  
connection, and otherwise to ON.  
COMPONENT/  
COMPOSITE  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 and CUE IN LEVEL  
switches:  
75Ω  
75Ω  
Set according to the analog/cue audio input  
level and the impedance.  
(see page 2-15)  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P  
COMPOSITE  
VIDEO INPUT  
REMOTE 1-IN  
(9P)  
AUDIO INPUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT  
CH1 to CH4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
CH1 to CH4  
DVR-28/28P/20/20P D2  
VTR, BVH-3000/3000PS  
1-inch VTR, etc. (player)  
REMOTE (9P)  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
CH1 to CH4  
REMOTE (9P)  
BVW-75/70/65/60 series  
Betacam SP VTR (player)  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
COMPONENT  
3-2  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo  
System  
This section describes how reference signals for the  
video output signals and servo system are selected.  
The output from the internal reference video signal  
generator is supplied to the output video signal and  
servo circuits as a reference signal.  
3-2-1 External Sync Signal for the Internal Reference Video Signal Generator  
The internal reference video signal generator is  
synchronized either to a reference video signal or to an  
input video signal. Depending on the settings of the  
function menu item OUTREF and setup menu item  
309, and the input signal selection, the external  
synchronization status is as shown in the following  
flowchart.  
The video signals are output always synchronized to  
the internal reference video signal.  
Start  
EXT  
AUTO1  
Setting of setup  
menu item 309?  
AUTO2  
Setting of OUTREF?  
REF  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Setting of OUTREF ?  
REF  
Yes  
Yes  
Currently recording  
or editing?  
Currently recording?  
No  
No  
Is a signal input to the  
connector selected with  
the VID.IN setting?  
Is a signal input to  
the REF. VIDEO  
INPUT connector?  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Synchronize to the input video  
signal selected with the VID.IN  
setting.  
Synchronize to the reference  
video signal input to the REF.  
VIDEO INPUT connector.  
No external synchronization  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
3-2-2 Reference Signal for the Servo System  
The VTR automatically selects either the input video  
signal or the output from the internal reference video  
signal generator as the reference signal for the servo  
system. Which of the two signals is selected depends  
on the operational status of the VTR, as shown in the  
following flowchart.  
Start  
EXT  
Setting of setup  
menu item 309?  
AUTO1  
AUTO2  
INPUT  
Setting of OUTREF?  
REF  
Currently  
recording or  
editing?  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Is a signal input to the  
connector selected with  
the VID.IN setting?  
Is a signal input to the  
REF. VIDEO INPUT  
connector?  
Yes  
Yes  
Lock the servo to the input  
video signal selected with  
VID.IN setting.  
Synchronize to the reference  
video signal input to the REF.  
VIDEO INPUT connector.  
No external synchronization  
3-4  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2-3 Connecting Reference Signals  
Connect reference signals as shown below, according  
to the way in which the unit is to be used.  
Connections for recording from a switcher or signal generator  
Reference signal  
Switcher or signal generator  
75 Ω termination switch: ON REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI INPUT  
75Ω  
75Ω  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P  
Connections for recording from an external VTR (player)  
Reference signal  
75 Ω termination switch: ON  
75 Ω termination switch: OFF  
REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
SDI INPUT  
SDI OUTPUT  
75Ω  
75Ω  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P (recorder)  
DNW-A65/A65P (player)  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
Connections for playback  
Reference signal  
Video monitor  
75 Ω termination switch: ON  
• SDI OUTPUT  
• COMPOSITE  
• COMPONENT  
REF. VIDEO  
INPUT  
75Ω  
75Ω  
DVW-M2000/M2000P/2000/2000P  
3-6  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3 Setup  
The principal setup operations before operating this  
unit can be carried out using setup menus.  
The setup menus of this unit comprise a basic setup  
menu and an extended setup menu. The contents of  
these menus are as follows.  
Basic setup menu:  
• Items relating to the hours meter  
• Items relating to operation  
• Items relating to menu banks  
Extended setup menu:  
• Items relating to control panels  
• Items relating to the remote control interface  
• Items relating to editing operations  
• Items relating to preroll  
• Items relating to tape protection  
• Items relating to the time code generator  
• Items relating to video control  
• Items relating to audio control  
• Items relating to digital processing  
For detailed information about the items, except for the  
basic setup menu items relating to the hours meter, of these  
menus and how to use them, see Chapter 12 “Setup Menus”.  
For detailed information about menu operations relating to  
the hours meter, see Section 14-5-1 “Digital Hours  
Meter”(page 14-5).  
This unit allows menu settings to be saved in what are  
termed “menu banks.” Saved sets of menu settings can  
be recalled for use as required.  
For more information about the menu banks, see the section  
“Menu bank operations (menu items B01 to B13)” (page  
12-4) .  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
3-4 Superimposed Character Information  
When the function menu item CHARA is set to ON,  
the video signal output from the COMPOSITE VIDEO  
Adjusting the character display  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector or the SDI OUTPUT  
You can adjust the position, size and type of the  
3 (SUPER) connector contains superimposed character  
superimposed characters using setup menu items 002,  
information, including time code, menu settings, and  
003, 005, 009, and 011.  
alarm messages.  
For details, see Section 12-3 “Items in the Basic Setup  
Menu” (page 12-5).  
Information displayed  
2 Time code reader drop frame mark  
(for 525-line mode only)  
1 Type of time data  
3 Time code generator drop frame mark (for  
525-line mode only)  
4 VITC field mark  
Time data  
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 . 4 0 . 1 8 *  
P
S H U T T L E  
S T I L L  
6 Operation mode  
5 Recorder/player selection  
Note  
1 Type of time data  
The display shown above corresponds to the factory  
default settings of the unit.  
Changing the setting of setup menu item 005 allows  
different time data to be displayed in the lower line of  
the display.  
Display  
CTL  
TCR  
UBR  
TCR.  
UBR.  
TCG  
UBG  
IN  
Meaning  
CTL counter data  
LTC reader time code  
LTC reader user’s bits  
VITC reader time code  
VITC reader user’s bits  
Time code generator time code  
Time code generator user’s bits  
IN point  
For details, see Section 12-3 “Items in the Basic Setup  
Menu” (page 12-5).  
OUT  
AI  
OUT point  
Audio IN point  
AO  
Audio OUT point  
DUR  
Duration between any two of the four edit  
points (IN, OUT, audio IN, audio OUT)  
Note  
If the time data or user’s bits cannot be read correctly,  
they will be displayed with an asterisk. For example,  
“T*R”, “U*R”, “T*R.” or “U*R.”.  
3-8  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Time code reader drop frame mark (for 525-line  
mode only)  
Display  
Block A  
Operation mode  
Block B  
“.”: Indicates drop frame mode  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
TAPE UNTHREAD  
STANDBY OFF  
T.RELEASE  
STOP  
Cassette is not loaded.  
Standby off mode  
Tape tension released  
Stop mode  
3 Time code generator drop frame mark (for 525-  
line mode only)  
“.”: Indicates drop frame mode (factory preset)  
“:”: Indicates non-drop-frame mode  
F.FWD  
Fast forward mode  
Rewind mode  
REW  
PREROLL  
PLAY  
Preroll mode  
Playback mode (servo unlocked)  
Record mode (servo locked)  
4 VITC field mark  
“ ” (blank): Fields 1 and 3 (for 525/60 mode) or  
fields 1, 3, 5 and 7 (for 625/50 mode)  
“ * ”: Fields 2 and 4 (for 525/60 mode) or fields 2, 4,  
6 and 8 (for 625/50 mode)  
PLAY  
PLAY  
LOCK  
Variation  
from normal  
speed (%)  
Capstan override mode (see  
page 4-9)  
REC  
REC  
EDIT  
EDIT  
JOG  
JOG  
JOG  
Record mode (servo unocked)  
Playback mode (servo locked)  
Edit mode (servo unlocked)  
Edit mode (servo locked)  
A still picture in jog mode  
Jog mode in forward direction  
Jog mode in reverse direction  
Shuttle mode  
LOCK  
5 Recorder/player selection  
The indication changes as follows, according to the  
state of the RECORDER or PLAYER buttons on the  
control panel.  
No display: Neither the RECORDER or PLAYER  
button is lit.  
P: The PLAYER button is lit.  
R: The RECORDER button is lit.  
LOCK  
STILL  
FWD  
REV  
SHUTTLE (Speed)  
VAR  
(Speed)  
Variable speed mode  
AUTO EDIT  
PREVIEW  
REVIEW  
DMC  
Automatic editing mode  
Preview mode  
6 Operation mode  
The field is divided into three blocks, A, B and C  
• Block A displays the operation mode.  
• Block B displays the servo lock status or tape speed.  
• Block C displays a x mark to indicate an edit section  
during automatic editing, or the section between the  
IN and OUT points in auto feed playback.  
Review mode  
(Speed)a)  
(Speed)a)  
(Speed)a)  
DMC playback mode  
D-PREV  
D-EDIT  
DMC editing preview mode  
DMC editing mode  
DMC-SPD (Speed)  
PLY-SPD Variation  
DMC initial speed setting  
Tape speed override mode  
from normal (when “TSO” is selected in  
speed (%)  
setup menu item 111)  
a) Initial speed settings or stored speed settings  
B
C
A
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
3-5 Cassettes  
3-5-1 Cassette Types  
3-5-2 Inserting and Ejecting  
Cassettes  
This unit uses the following digital Betacam cassettes  
for both recording and playback.  
It is not possible to insert or eject a cassette unless the  
unit is powered on.  
Digital Betacam cassettes  
Small cassettes  
Large cassettes  
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40  
Inserting a cassette  
BCT-D34L/D64L/D94L/D124L  
The following tapes can be used for playback (on  
DVW-M2000/M2000P).  
• MPEG IMX cassettes  
EJECT button  
1
2
• Betacam SX cassettes  
• Betacam SP cassettes (metal tape)  
• Betacam cassettes (oxide tape)  
Small cassette  
Large cassette  
STANDBY  
STANDBY button  
REW  
F FWD STOP  
PLAY  
STOP button  
1 Turn the POWER switch on.  
2 Check the following points, then insert the cassette  
in the orientation shown in the figure.  
• Check that message “ERR-10” is not shown in  
the time data/menu display section.  
• Check that there is no slack in the tape.  
The cassette is drawn into the unit, and the  
STANDBY and STOP buttons light.  
If message “ERR-10” appears in the time data/menu display  
section, there is moisture condensation in the unit (see page  
14-4).  
3-10  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing slack from the tape  
Press in one of the reels with a finger, and turn gently  
in the direction shown by the arrows until there is no  
slack in the tape.  
Ejecting a cassette  
Press the EJECT button.  
Note  
Ejecting is a local operation. It is not possible to eject a  
cassette in another unit by remote control.  
If the tape slacks inside the unit, pressing the EJECT button  
may not eject the cassette. For information about how to  
remove the cassette in such a case, refer to Section 1-17 in  
the Installation Manual.  
3-5-3 Preventing Accidental  
Erasure of Recordings  
To prevent a tape from being inadvertently erased,  
press in the red record inhibit plug on the cassette.  
Large cassette  
Small cassette  
Press in the red record inhibit plug. (“ON”)  
Return this plug to its original position to enable recording on the  
tape again. (“OFF”)  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System  
3-6 Using a Memory Stick  
When a Memory Stick (option) is inserted in the  
VTR, the file data can be stored on the Memory Stick,  
Types of Memory Stick  
which enables you to share data among VTRs.  
There are two types of Memory Stick: MagicGate  
Memory Stick that are equipped with the MagicGate  
copyright protection technology and general Memory  
Stick. Use the general type of Memory Stick (8MF,  
16MF, 32MF, 64MF, 128MB) with this unit.  
Inserting a Memory Stick  
Insert a Memory Stick with the label side up into the  
Memory Stick slot until it clicks and the access lamp  
lights in red.  
On MagicGate  
MagicGate is copyright-protection technology that  
uses encryption technology.  
Label side  
Before using a Memory Stick  
Terminal  
Memory Stick  
Write-protect tab  
Note  
Never insert/remove a Memory Stick during access to  
data.  
To remove a Memory Stick  
If you push the inserted Memory Stick, the Memory  
Stick will pop out a little. Then pull the Memory Stick  
out.  
Labeling position  
• You cannot record or erase data when the write-protect  
tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.  
• We recommend backing up important data.  
• Image data may be damaged in the following cases:  
– If you remove the Memory Stick, or turn the  
power off when the access lamp is lit or flashing  
– If you use a Memory Stick near static electricity or  
a magnetic field  
3-6-1 Notes on Memory Stick  
On Memory Stick  
Memory Stick is a new compact, portable and  
versatile IC recording medium with a data capacity  
that exceeds that of a floppy disk. Memory Stick is  
specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital  
data among Memory Stick compatible products.  
Because it is removable, Memory Stick can also be  
used for external data storage.  
3-12  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming  
into contact with the terminal of the connecting  
section.  
• Do not attach any material other than the supplied  
label to the label space.  
• Attach the label at the prescribed labeling position.  
Make sure the label is attached at the labeling  
position properly.  
• Do not bend, drop, or apply strong shock to a  
Memory Stick.  
• Do not disassemble or modify a Memory Stick.  
• Do not let the Memory Stick get wet.  
• Do not use or keep a Memory Stick in locations that  
are:  
– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun  
– Under direct sunlight  
– Very humid or subject to corrosive gases  
• When you carry or store a Memory Stick, keep it in  
its case.  
During access to data  
While data are being read from or written to the  
Memory Stick, do not shake this unit or subject it to  
shock. Do not turn off the power of the unit or remove  
the Memory Stick. This may damage the data.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
• Memory Stick and  
are the trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
• MagicGate Memory Stick and  
are the  
trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
Chapter 3 Preparations  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1 Recording  
This section describes video and audio recording on  
the unit.  
4-1-1 Preparations for Recording  
For details on each setting, see the pages indicated in  
parenthesis.  
Switch and menu settings  
Before beginning recording, make necessary switch  
and menu settings.  
POWER switch: ‘ ( ’ side (ON)  
REMOTE buttons (see page 2-2): off  
Audio signal selection buttons (see page 2-5):  
Select the audio channel to be monitored.  
CONFI (ON)/PREREAD indicators (see page 2-8): lit  
Z
VID.IN setting (see page 11-3):  
Select the input video signal.  
PREREAD setting  
(see page 11-8): OFF  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B  
PB  
OFF  
TC  
CONFI setting (see page 11-3):  
ENABLE  
PB/EE setting (see page 11-3): PB  
CTL/TC setting (see page 11-3):  
Select the time data to be displayed.  
RECINH setting (see page 11-8):  
OFF  
Audio selection function selector buttons  
(see page 2-4): Select the input audio signal.  
REC controls (see page 2-6):  
Adjust the audio recording levels.  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
4-1 Recording  
Adjusting the audio recording levels  
To use the emphasis function  
When carrying out audio recording at a  
reference level  
Leave the REC controls pressed in. The audio signals  
will be recorded at a preset reference level (a reference  
0 dB indication for an input of +4 dBm).  
To add emphasis to the analog input audio signal or  
analog playback audio signal, set the EMPHSS to ON  
(see page 11-6).  
When the signal to which emphasis has been applied is  
played back, it is automatically subjected to  
deemphasis processing.  
Manually adjusting the recording levels  
For each channel, press to protrude the REC control in  
the upper control panel, and adjust so that the audio  
level indication is 0 dB for an average volume. Carry  
out the adjustment in E-E mode.  
Using the emphasis-deemphasis processing enables the  
dynamic range to be improved by reducing high-  
frequency noise.  
4-1-2 Recording Time Code and  
User Bit Values  
For details of selecting the E-E mode, see the description of  
the REC button in the tape transport control section (page  
2-10) and the PB/EE setting in function menu HOME page  
(page 11-3).  
There are three ways of recording time code, as  
follows:  
• Setting an initial value, then recording the output of  
the internal time code generator  
• Recording the output of the internal time code  
generator synchronized to an external time code  
generator  
To change the display range of the audio  
level indications  
Press the DISPLAY FULL/FINE button (see page  
2-4).  
• Recording the output of an external time code  
without modification  
To monitor the simultaneous playback of  
the recorded video and audio signals  
To set an initial value then record the time  
code  
Set the CONFI to ENABLE (see page 11-3) to light  
the CONFI indicator. It is now possible to  
simultaneously monitor the video and audio signals  
being recorded.  
If necessary, change the settings in function menu page  
1 (see page 11-4).  
Set the TCG (F1) to INT, and the TCG (F2) to  
PRESET.  
4-2  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting an initial time code value  
Use the following procedure.  
Setting the time code value to the real time  
With the settings in function menu page 1 set as  
follows, carry out the procedure under the heading  
above, “Setting an initial time code value”. In steps 3  
and 4, set the value slightly after the current time, then  
carry out step 6 at the instant the real time catches up  
with the setting.  
RESET button  
Z
TCG (F1): INT  
TCG (F2): PRESET  
RUN: FREE  
DF: DF (525/60 mode only)  
Setting a user bit value  
The user bit values recorded on the time code track  
provide for eight hexadecimal digits, which can be  
used to hold the date, time, or other information.  
Use the following procedure.  
1,2,3,4,5,6  
1 Set the CTL/TC to UB.  
1 Set the CTL/TC to TC.  
2 Carry out the procedure in steps 2 to 6 under the  
heading above, “Setting an initial time code  
value”.  
2 Press the F6 (TCGSET) button.  
The function menu display changes as follows.  
You can set each digit to any hexadecimal value,  
represented by 0 to 9, and A to F.  
00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
TCG  
SET  
SET  
EXIT  
The first digit of the time code value (8 digits:  
hours, minutes, seconds, and frames) flashes.  
Note  
If any of the settings (to write a recording start mark)  
in item G03 of the shot mark operation menu are set to  
ON, then for 20 frames from each recording, assemble  
editing, or insert editing start, the user bits are  
overwritten with the shot mark data.  
To set all digits to zero  
Press the RESET button.  
3 Press the F1 (T) or F2 (t) button to select the  
digit to be changed.  
Pressing the F2 (t) button moves the flashing  
digit position to the right, and pressing the F1 (T)  
button moves the flashing digit position to the left.  
4 Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob or press the F3  
(+)/F4 (–) button to change the value in the  
flashing digit position.  
5 Until all the digits are set as required, repeat steps  
3 and 4.  
6 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
When the RUN is set to FREE in function menu  
page 1, the time code value immediately starts  
advancing.  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
4-1 Recording  
2 Perform the following settings in function menu  
page 1.  
To synchronize the internal time code  
generator to an external signal  
• When synchronizing to an external time code  
output (LTC) or the time code (VITC) in an input  
video signal:  
TCG (F1): EXT  
TCG (F2): REGEN  
VITC: ON (when recording VITC)  
TCR: LTC or VITC according as you are  
synchronizing to LTC or VITC (If set to  
AUTO, LTC is used.)  
• When synchronizing to the time code (SMPTE  
RP188) in an SDI signal:  
Use this method to synchronize the time code  
generators of a number of VTRs, or to record the  
playback time code signal from an external VTR  
without deterioration of the signal waveform.  
In this case the RUN and DF settings are ignored. You  
can synchronize the internal time code generator to  
either of the following external time codes.  
• The time code output (LTC) of an external time code  
generator or external VTR connected to the TIME  
CODE IN connector of the unit  
TCG (F1): RP188  
TCG (F2), VITC, TCR: Any setting  
• The time code (VITC) present in a video signal input  
to the unit  
• The time code (SMPTE RP188) present in an SDI  
signal input to the unit  
Note  
When the TCG (F1) is set to RP188, when settings  
of the TCG (F1) and VID.IN conflict with each  
other, or when the input signal selected with the  
VID.IN is not present, the TCG (F1) setting  
display flashes.  
To synchronize the internal time code generator to an  
external signal, use the following procedure.  
Z
This starts the internal time code generator running  
in synchronization with the external time code  
generator.  
Once the internal time code generator is  
synchronized with the external time code  
generator, even if the external time code generator  
connection is removed, the internal time code  
generator continues to run.  
TIME CODE  
1,2  
IN  
OUT  
1
TIME CODE IN connector  
1 • When synchronizing to an external time code  
output (LTC):  
Connect the time code output of the external time  
code generator or external VTR to the TIME  
CODE IN connector.  
• When synchronizing to the time code (VITC) in  
an input video signal:  
With the VID.IN in function menu HOME page,  
select an input video signal containing VITC.  
• When synchronizing to the time code (SMPTE  
RP188) in an SDI signal:  
With the VID.IN in function menu HOME page,  
select SDI.  
4-4  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To record an external time code without  
modification  
4-1-3 Recording Procedure  
To record, use the following procedure.  
Using this method has no effect on the running of the  
internal time code generator.  
To record the playback time code from an external  
VTR, the method under the heading above, “To  
synchronize the internal time code generator to an  
external signal”, is recommended.  
Z
Z
1 2 3  
1 Insert a cassette.  
TIME CODE  
OUT  
For details, see the section “Inserting a cassette” (page  
3-10).  
2
IN  
1
2 Hold down the REC button, and press the PLAY  
button.  
Recording starts, the servo locks, and the SERVO  
indicator lights.  
1 Connect the time code output of the external time  
code generator to the TIME CODE IN connector.  
3 To stop recording, press the STOP button.  
2 Perform the following settings in function menu  
page 1:  
If you record to the end of the tape  
The tape is automatically rewound, and stops.  
TCG (F1): EXT  
TCG (F2): PRESET  
It is possible to disable the automatic rewind function by  
changing the setting of setup menu item 125.  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
4-1 Recording  
4-2 Playback  
This section describes playback of video and audio.  
4-2-1 Preparations for Playback  
For details on each setting, see the pages indicated in  
parenthesis.  
Switch and menu settings  
Before beginning playback, make necessary switch  
and menu settings.  
POWER switch: ‘ ( ’ side (ON)  
REMOTE buttons (see page 2-2): off  
Audio signal selection buttons (see page 2-5):  
Select the audio channel(s) to be monitored.  
Z
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B  
PB  
OFF  
TC  
PB controls (see page 2-6):  
Adjust the audio playback levels.  
TCR setting (see page 11-4): Select the time code to be displayed.  
PB/EE setting (see page 11-3): PB  
TCG (F2) setting (see page 11-4): Select the output time code.  
TCG (F1) setting (see page 11-4): INT  
CTL/TC setting (see page 11-3): Select the time data to be displayed.  
4-6  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time data selection  
Normal playback  
Displayed time data  
First insert a cassette.  
Use the CTL/TC setting in function menu HOME page  
to select one of CTL (control), time code, and user bit  
values. When you select time code, the data displayed  
is determined by the TCR setting (LTC/AUTO/VITC)  
in function menu page 1 as follows.  
For details of how to insert a cassette, see Section 3-5-2  
“Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes” (page 3-10).  
Cassette compartment  
TCR setting  
LTC  
Displayed data  
LTC recorded on tape  
Z
AUTO  
LTC or VITC (automatically switched)  
VITC recorded on tape  
VITC  
Output time code  
The TCG (F2) setting and setup menu item 606  
determine whether the time code output from the  
TIME CODE OUT connector is the time code  
generated by the internal time code generator  
(REGEN), or the playback time code (PRESET).  
STOP button  
PLAY button  
For details of the TCG (F2) settings, see page 11-4.  
To start playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
Playback starts, the servo locks, and the SERVO  
indicator lights.  
4-2-2 Playback Procedures  
This section describes the following types of playback  
which the unit can carry out:  
• Normal playback  
To stop playback  
Press the STOP button.  
Playback at normal (×1) speed  
If you play back to the end of the tape  
The tape is automatically rewound, and stops.  
• Playback in jog mode  
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined  
by the speed of turning the search dial  
• Playback in shuttle mode  
Variable speed playback, with the speed determined  
by the angular position of the search dial  
• Playback in variable speed mode  
Variable speed playback, with the speed finely  
determined by the angular position of the search dial  
• Playback using the capstan override function  
The playback speed is adjusted temporarily according  
to the angular position of the search dial, to align the  
playback phase with that of another VTR.  
• DMC Playback  
It is possible to disable the automatic rewind function by  
changing the setting of setup menu item 125.  
When using the Dolby noise reduction system  
When using an analog Betacam cassette, you can use  
Dolby C noise reduction for audio playback.  
To activate the Dolby noise reduction system, set the  
DOLBY of function menu page 4 to NR ON (see page  
11-7).  
Playback carried out at memorized varying speed.  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
4-2 Playback  
Playback in jog mode  
Playback in shuttle mode  
In jog mode, you can control the speed of playback by  
the speed of turning the search dial. The playback  
speed range is 1 times normal speed.  
In shuttle mode, you can control the speed of playback  
by the angular position of the search dial. The range of  
playback speed is as follows:  
• Using a Digital Betacam tape: 50 times  
• Using an MPEG IMX tape: 78 times  
• Using a Betacam SX tape: 78 times  
• Using an analog Betacam tape: 35 times (for 525/60  
mode) or 42 times (for 625/50 mode)  
There are detents on the search dial at the still position  
and at 5 times normal speed.  
The playback speed range can be 3 times normal speed by  
changing the setting of setup menu item 116.  
To carry out playback in jog mode, use the following  
procedure.  
To carry out playback in shuttle mode, use the  
following procedure.  
Z
Z
1 1,2,3  
1 Press the JOG button or search dial so that the JOG  
1 3 1,2,3  
button is lit.  
1 Press the SHUTTLE button or search dial so that  
Pressing the search dial toggles between jog mode  
and shuttle mode.  
the SHUTTLE button is lit.  
Pressing the search dial toggles between jog mode  
and shuttle mode.  
2 Turn the search dial in the desired direction, at the  
speed corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
2 Turn the search dial to the desired angle  
Playback in jog mode starts.  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
Playback in shuttle mode starts.  
3 To stop playback in jog mode, stop turning the  
search dial.  
3 To stop playback in shuttle mode, return the search  
dial to the center position, or press the STOP  
button.  
The function to toggle between jog mode and shuttle  
mode each time the search dial is pressed can be  
disabled by changing the setting of setup menu item  
101.  
The function to toggle between jog mode and shuttle  
mode each time the search dial is pressed can be  
disabled by changing the setting of setup menu item  
101.  
To return to normal-speed playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
4-8  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To alternate between normal-speed playback  
and shuttle mode playback  
To alternate between normal-speed playback  
and variable speed mode playback  
Set the search dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired shuttle playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and shuttle playback by  
pressing the PLAY and SHUTTLE buttons alternately.  
For intermittent shuttle mode playback, press the  
STOP and SHUTTLE buttons alternately.  
Set the search dial to the position corresponding to the  
desired variable playback speed, then switch between  
normal-speed playback and variable speed playback by  
pressing the PLAY and VAR buttons alternately.  
For intermittent variable speed mode playback, press  
the STOP and VAR buttons alternately.  
Playback in variable speed mode  
Playback using the capstan override  
function  
In variable speed mode, you can finely control (51  
steps) the playback speed in the following speed  
ranges depending on the tape format.  
You can use the capstan override function to adjust the  
playback speed temporarily. This function is  
Digital Betacam: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
MPEG IMX: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
Betacam SX: –1 to +2 times normal speed  
Betacam/Betacam SP: –1 to +3 times normal speed  
There are detents on the search dial at the still position  
and at 1 times normal speed.  
convenient for playback phase synchronization with  
another VTR playing back the same program.  
Two types of playback operation are available using  
the capstan override function (capstan override  
playback).  
To carry out playback in variable speed mode, use the  
following procedure.  
To perform temporal capstan override  
playback  
Z
Z
1 3 2,3  
1(B)  
2
1(A)  
1 Press the VAR button, turning it on.  
1 (A) Hold down the PLAY button, and turn the  
search dial in the desired direction to adjust the  
playback speed.  
2 Turn the search dial to the desired angle  
corresponding to the desired playback speed.  
The range of speed adjustment is 15% in  
steps of 1%.  
Playback in variable speed mode starts.  
(B) Hold down the PLAY button, and press the  
TRIM buttons to adjust the playback speed.  
The playback speed can be adjusted to 8%  
only.  
3 To stop playback in variable speed mode, return  
the search dial to the center position, or press the  
STOP button.  
To return to normal-speed playback  
Press the PLAY button.  
The SERVO indicator goes off.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
4-2 Playback  
2 When the adjustment is completed, release the  
PLAY button.  
The tape transport returns to normal speed, and the  
SERVO indicator comes on again.  
To perform continuous capstan override  
playback  
Z
3
2
1 Set setup menu item 111 (TSO PLAY) to TSO.  
2 Hold down the DMC EDIT button and turn the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to select the playback  
speed.  
The selected playback speed is displayed in time  
data display area 2 on the lower control panel of  
this unit as well as in the character information  
display on the monitor screen.  
3 Press the PLAY button while holding down the  
DMC EDIT button.  
4 Press the PLAY button or perform any other  
operation to exit the tape speed override mode.  
See Section 12-2 “Setup Menu operations” (page 12-2) for  
details of setup menu operations.  
For details of character information displayed on the video  
monitor screen, see the descriptions of F4 (CHARA) in  
function menu page 4 (page 11-7) and setup menu item 005  
(page 12-5).  
4-10  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2-3 Dynamic Motion Control (DMC) Playback  
Overview  
DMC playback allows you to vary the playback speed  
for a certain section of a tape, in variable speed mode  
(from –1 to +3 times normal speed for digital Betacam  
playback, from –1 to +3 times normal speed for MPEG  
IMX playback, from –1 to +2 times normal speed for  
Betacam SX playback, or from –1 to +3 times normal  
speed for analog Betacam playback), and store the  
varying speed in memory for later playback at the  
same varying speed.  
For example, during a live broadcast of a sporting  
event you can set the start and end points of highlights  
while recording, and then provide immediate DMC  
playback of those highlights.  
During DMC playback the tape moves as shown in the  
following figure.  
Speed variation end point  
On-air start point Preroll point  
Waiting for the on-air cue  
before starting DMC  
playback  
Speed variation start point  
On-air end point  
Stop  
Press the REVIEW button.  
Normal speed  
playback  
Press the REVIEW button again  
at the on-air cue.  
DMC playback  
Normal speed playback  
Stop  
Starting DMC playback  
immediately after preroll  
Press the PREVIEW button.  
Normal speed  
playback  
DMC playback  
Normal speed playback  
1 Press the DMC EDIT button, turning it on.  
Storing a varying playback speed in  
memory  
2 Either while playing back the recorded tape, or  
during recording, press the ENTRY button and one  
of the following buttons simultaneously, to set the  
start and end points.  
To store the playback speed for DMC playback, use  
the following procedure.  
Note  
• On-air start point: AUDIO IN button  
• Speed variation start point: IN button  
• Speed variation end point: OUT button  
• On-air end point: AUDIO OUT button  
Make sure that the TSO PLAY of setup menu item 111  
is set to DIS beforehand.  
Z
Each press turns the corresponding button on.  
3 Press the search dial or the SHUTTLE button or  
VAR button to enter shuttle/variable speed mode.  
The SHUTTLE/VAR indicator lights.  
(Continued)  
1,4 5 2 7 3 3,4,6  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 Playback  
4 Holding down the DMC EDIT button, turn the  
search dial, to set the initial speed at the playback  
start point.  
Executing DMC Playback  
There are two methods of starting DMC playback.  
• Starting playback at the on-air cue from the on-air  
start point  
The speed you set appears in the speed indication  
area. During this period the tape does not move.  
When the initial speed setting is complete, release  
the DMC EDIT button.  
• Starting playback immediately after preroll  
Notes  
• To avoid operating mistakes we recommend that you  
use the VTR in standalone mode when carrying out  
DMC playback.  
• When using two VTRs connected for editing, you can  
only use the recorder VTR for DMC playback, and  
only when neither the RECORDER nor PLAYER  
button is lit.  
5 Press the PREVIEW button.  
The tape is prerolled and played back at normal  
speed from the on-air start point to the speed  
variation start point. On passing the speed variation  
start point, the MEMORY indicator begins to  
flash, and playback begins at the speed set in step  
4.  
To start playback at the on-air cue from the  
on-air start point  
Use the following procedure.  
6 Turn the search dial to vary the playback speed.  
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, the  
speed variations are stored in memory. On passing  
the speed variation end point, the MEMORY  
indicator changes from flashing to continuously lit,  
and the variable speed storing ends.  
Z
7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.  
If the MEMORY indicator lights continuously  
before the speed variation end point  
This indicates that the memory became full at that  
point. It is therefore not possible to record more speed  
variation. The maximum capacity is a duration of 120  
seconds.  
1,2  
1 Press the REVIEW button.  
The REVIEW button lights, and the tape is cued up  
to the on-air start point. After the tape is cued up,  
the REVIEW button flashes.  
To amend the stored speed variation  
Press the PREVIEW button.  
The interval between the speed variation start and end  
points is automatically played back at the stored speed.  
Operate the search dial as required, to adjust the  
playback speed.  
2 At the moment the on-air cue is given, press the  
REVIEW button once more.  
The REVIEW button lights, and playback starts at  
standard speed.  
Between the speed variation start and end points,  
DMC playback is carried out at the stored speed,  
and then playback continues at normal speed and  
the tape stops at the on-air end point.  
Setting the initial speed to normal speed  
In step 4, press the PLAY button.  
4-12  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To start playback immediately after preroll  
Press the PREVIEW button.  
The PREVIEW button lights, and after preroll, DMC  
playback is carried out for the section from the speed  
variation start point, then playback continues at normal  
speed from the speed variation end point.  
To stop the tape during DMC playback  
Press the STOP button.  
To exit DMC playback mode  
Press the DMC EDIT button and the DELETE button  
simultaneously.  
Chapter 4 Recording and Playback  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
This section describes how to carry out automatic  
editing with this unit and another VTR connected to  
the REMOTE1-IN(9P) connector.  
Sequence of editing operations  
The following flowchart outlines the sequence of  
operations in automatic editing with two VTRs.  
5-1-1 Overview  
Selecting the editing mode (page 5-3)  
Setting the recorder and player edit points (page 5-3)  
Previewing the edit segments (page 5-7)  
Editing mode  
• Assemble editing  
This is the editing mode in which successive portions  
of the edited result are recorded on the end of the  
already completed section.  
The CTL signal, video signal, audio signal, and time  
code are all newly recorded on the tape.  
• Insert editing  
Amending edit points as necessary (page 5-6)  
In this mode, new material is recorded at an  
intermediate point of an existing recording.  
The CTL signal is not recorded. The video signal,  
audio signal, and time code signal can all be  
independently recorded.  
Carrying out automatic editing (page 5-8)  
Checking the editing results as necessary (page 5-9)  
You can carry out DMC editing in both editing modes.  
In insert editing, split editing is also possible.  
Using an editing control unit  
When controlling this unit with an editing control unit,  
set an edit delay on the editing control unit so that cut  
in and cut out instructions are output 5 frames before  
the actual edit point.  
Using CTL to interpolate time code values  
When you are using time code values as edit point  
addresses, the time code must be recorded on the tape  
in correct time sequence (i.e. the sections must be in  
strictly ascending time order).  
Notes on video output to the monitor  
If the time code values are all in correct time sequence,  
then if there are any discontinuities in the time code,  
the unit allows them to be interpolated using the CTL  
counter.  
In E-E mode, the video output of the unit is delayed by  
the time for video circuit processing with respect to the  
input video signal (8H).  
Unlike the playback operations described in Chapter 4,  
for playback to be carried out in editing mode with  
both the player and recorder specified, you can use  
setup menu item 701 to delay the SYNC phase,  
delaying it by 8H.  
Recording time code  
For automatic editing, regardless of the TCG (F1) and  
TCG (F2) settings, time code is recorded continuously  
from the previous time code recorded on the tape.  
Using setup menu item 610, it is also possible to record time  
code according to the settings in the function menu.  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
5-1-2 Switch and Menu Settings  
Before beginning editing, make necessary switch and  
menu settings.  
Recorder settings  
POWER switch: ‘ ( ’ side (ON)  
REMOTE buttons (see page 2-2): 1(9P)  
Editing mode setting section (see page 2-11): Select assemble editing or insert editing.  
Z
VID.IN setting (see page 11-3):  
Select the input video signal.  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B PB OFF TC  
RECINH setting (see page 11-8):  
OFF  
CTL/TC setting (see page 11-3):  
TC or CTL  
Audio selection function selector buttons (see page 2-4):  
Select the input audio signal.  
REC controls (see page 2-6): Adjust  
the audio recording levels.  
Player settings  
POWER switch: ‘ ( ’ side (ON)  
REMOTE buttons (see page 2-2): 1(9P)  
Z
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B  
PB  
OFF  
TC  
PB controls (see page 2-6):  
Adjust the audio playback levels.  
CTL/TC setting (see page 11-3): TC or CTL  
5-2  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
to select the VTR on which you will set the edit  
point.  
5-1-3 Selecting the Editing Mode  
To select the editing mode  
Select assemble editing or insert editing.  
The button which you have pressed lights.  
ASSEMBLE button  
INSERT buttons  
2 Turn the search dial in jog or shuttle mode, and  
position the tape at the required edit point.  
Z
For details of playback in jog or shuttle mode, see the  
sections “Playback in jog mode” and “Playback in  
shuttle mode” (page 4-8).  
3 At the point at which you wish to set the IN point  
or OUT point, hold down the ENTRY button and  
press the IN button or OUT button as the case may  
be.  
IN/OUT buttons  
When the IN point or OUT point is set, the IN  
button or OUT button respectively lights.  
Depending on the editing mode, press the following  
button or buttons.  
• For assemble editing: ASSEMBLE button  
• For insert editing: the desired INSERT buttons  
(VIDEO, CH1 to CH4, CUE, TC)  
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all the necessary edit  
points are set.  
When you select the editing mode, the IN/OUT  
buttons begin to flash, indicating that the edit points  
require setting.  
When the IN points on both the recorder and  
player are set, the PREVIEW button and AUTO  
EDIT button flash, and it becomes possible to  
carry out a preview or editing operation.  
5-1-4 Setting Edit Points  
Automatic setting of edit points  
Set the edit points (IN and OUT points). To use split  
editing in insert mode, you can set the audio and video  
edit points separately.  
Editing requires four edit points: the IN and OUT  
points on both the recorder and player. However, once  
any three of these points are defined, the last point is  
set automatically. For example, if you set the recorder  
IN and OUT points, and the player IN point, the player  
OUT point is set automatically.  
To set an edit point  
Note  
Z
In the following cases, the DELETE button begins to  
flash and you cannot carry out automatic editing.  
• The OUT point is before the IN point.  
• All four of the recorder IN and OUT points and the  
player IN and OUT points have been set.  
Use the DELETE button to delete a redundant edit  
point, or set the edit points correctly.  
3
1 2  
For details of deleting edit points, see the section “Deleting  
an edit point” (page 5-6).  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
Note  
Setting split edit points  
During split editing, if you set six or more edit points  
for the recorder and player, the DELETE button starts  
to flash, to indicate that such a setup is impossible.  
Delete all unnecessary edit points, using the DELETE  
button.  
In split editing, you can set the edit points for audio  
and video independently. Set the audio edit points with  
the AUDIO IN/OUT buttons, and the video edit points  
with the IN/OUT buttons.  
Note that split editing is only possible when the  
recording mode is insert editing.  
For details of how to delete edit points, see the section  
“Deleting an edit point” (page 5-6).  
Automatic setting of edit points in split editing  
Split editing requires a total of eight edit points: four  
video edit points (player IN and OUT and recorder IN  
and OUT) and four audio edit points (player audio IN  
and OUT and recorder audio IN and OUT). However,  
as soon as you set five points, the system automatically  
calculates and sets the remaining three points.  
Z
Specifically, once you have set three of the four video  
edit points and two audio edit points, the remaining  
three edit points are set automatically, regardless of  
whether these points are for the recorder or player.  
4 1 2 3  
1 Press the appropriate INSERT button (VIDEO,  
In the figure below, the edit points shown within boxes  
are already set. The other edit points (recorder audio  
OUT point, and player audio IN and video OUT  
points) are set automatically.  
CH1 to CH4, CUE, or TC).  
The IN/OUT button flash.  
Note that, regardless of whether it was set manually or  
automatically, any edit point can be deleted or  
corrected later.  
2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to  
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.  
The button you have pressed lights.  
OUT point  
Audio IN point  
IN point Audio OUT point  
3 To find the edit point, rotate the search dial in jog  
or shuttle mode.  
Recorder  
For details of jog/shuttle mode playback, see the  
sections “Playback in jog mode” and “Playback in  
shuttle mode” (page 4-8).  
Player  
4 Press the ENTRY button together with one of the  
IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, and AUDIO OUT buttons,  
to set the edit point.  
OUT point  
IN point Audio OUT point  
Audio IN point  
You can set audio cut in, crossfade, fade in, and fade out  
effects, including their durations, by menu selection.  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.  
Once an edit point is set, the corresponding button  
changes from flashing to continuously lit.  
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set the required edit  
points.  
As each edit point is set, the corresponding button  
changes from flashing to continuously lit.  
5-4  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the audio IN point is not set for insert  
editing of audio only  
To display the duration of an edit segment  
As long as the audio OUT point is set, the VTR is  
ready for preview or editing. If the audio IN point has  
not been set, the current tape position is automatically  
used as the audio IN point.  
You can display the duration between two edit points  
in the following three cases, in the time data/menu  
display section (see page 2-7).  
• When two edit points are set: the duration of the  
segment between the two points  
• When only one edit point is set: the duration of the  
segment between the point which is set and the  
current tape position  
• When no edit point is set: the duration of the previous  
edit segment  
Using a VTR without a split editing function as  
the player  
If it is not possible to set separate audio and video edit  
points on the VTR you are using as the player, by  
setting the audio IN and OUT points on the recorder  
(this unit), then setting three video edit points, split  
editing is possible.  
The duration is displayed in time data display area 2,  
thus: “DURATION 0:01:10:00”.  
To display a duration, use the following procedure.  
To display the time value for an edit point  
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
to select the VTR on which you wish to check the  
duration.  
You can display the time value for an edit point in the  
time data/menu display section (see page 2-7).  
The edit point appears in time data display area 2.  
The button you have pressed lights.  
Time data display area 1  
Time data display area 2  
2 Hold down any two of the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN  
and AUDIO OUT buttons.  
Z
While you hold down the buttons, the duration is  
displayed in time data display area 2.  
2 1  
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
to select the VTR on which you wish to check the  
edit point.  
The button you have pressed lights.  
2 Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO  
OUT button according to the edit point you wish to  
check.  
While you hold down the button, the  
corresponding indicator lights in the upper line of  
time data display area 2, and the time value of the  
edit point is displayed.  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
Deleting an edit point  
5-1-5 Modifying and Deleting  
Edit Points  
To delete an edit point, use the following procedure.  
You can use the same procedure whether or not the  
DELETE button is flashing.  
If the edit points are not set correctly, for example if an  
OUT point is before a corresponding IN point, the  
DELETE button flashes, and it is not possible to carry  
out a preview or editing operation. In this case, either  
modify the erroneous edit point, or first delete it and  
then enter it correctly.  
Z
Modifying an edit point  
To modify an edit point, use the following procedure.  
Time data display area 1  
Time data display area 2  
2
1
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
to select the VTR on which you wish to delete the  
edit point.  
Z
The button you have pressed lights.  
2 Hold down the DELETE button and press the IN,  
OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button  
according to the edit point you wish to delete.  
2 1  
The edit point is deleted according to which button  
you pressed, and the DELETE button goes off.  
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
to select the VTR on which you wish to modify the  
edit point.  
The button you have pressed lights.  
2 Hold down the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO  
OUT button corresponding to the edit point you  
wish to modify, and press the TRIM buttons  
(+ or –).  
While you hold down the button, the time value for  
the edit point appears in the display; pressing the +  
button increases the value by one frame, and  
pressing the – button decreases it by one frame.  
5-6  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1-6 Cue-Up to Edit Points and  
Preroll  
5-1-7 Preview  
When you have set the edit points, the PREVIEW  
button flashes, indicating that you can carry out a  
preview.  
To preroll to a position before an edit IN point or cue  
up to any edit point, use the following procedure.  
To carry out a preview, use the following procedure.  
Z
Z
2 1  
2
1
1 Press the RECORDER button or PLAYER button  
1 Press the RECORDER button, turning it on.  
to select the VTR on which you wish to operate.  
The button you have pressed lights.  
2 Press the PREVIEW button.  
2 • To cue up to an edit point  
The PREVIEW button changes from flashing to  
continuously lit, and the preview is carried out.  
At the end of the preview, the PREVIEW button  
flashes again.  
Hold down the IN/OUT button or AUDIO IN/  
OUT button according to the edit point to which  
you wish to cue up, and press the PREROLL  
button.  
To stop the preview  
Press the STOP button.  
This cues up to the edit point you have selected.  
• To preroll  
Press the PREROLL button.  
The tape stops at the position where you pressed  
the button.  
The tape is wound back to a position 5 seconds  
before the edit IN point, and stops.  
To return the tape to the preroll point  
Press the PREROLL button.  
To change the preroll time  
To return the tape to the IN point or OUT point  
Press the PREROLL button and the IN button or OUT  
button simultaneously.  
The factory default setting for the preroll time is 5  
seconds, but you can use setup menu item 001 to  
change this to any value from 0 to 30 seconds. If you  
change the preroll time, make sure that the setting is  
not longer than the recording length before the edit IN  
point.  
After the preview, make any necessary adjustments to  
the edit points, then repeat the preview.  
Note that for automatic editing, the preroll time setting  
on the recorder takes precedence.  
For details of how to modify or delete edit points, see  
Section 5-1-5 “Modifying and Deleting Edit Points”  
(page 5-6).  
For details of setup menu item 001, see Section 12-3 “Items  
in the Basic Setup Menu” (page 12-5).  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
• From the OUT point to the postroll point, you can  
monitor the playback from the recorder.  
Monitor output  
During a preview, on a monitor connected to the  
recorder you can monitor the following video and  
audio.  
The following figure illustrates this.  
IN point  
OUT point  
• From the preroll point to the IN point, you can  
monitor the playback from the recorder.  
• From the IN point to the OUT point, you can monitor  
the playback from the player through the recorder in  
E-E mode.  
Playback  
(recorder)  
Playback  
(recorder)  
E-E mode  
(player)  
5-1-8 Carrying Out Automatic Editing  
Tape transport  
Preroll point  
IN Point  
OUT Point  
Postroll point  
Recorder  
Preroll  
Postroll  
Edit segment  
Recording overlap  
(in case of assemble  
editing)  
Stop  
Player  
Time flow  
Playback  
Stop  
Monitor output  
Overview  
During execution of an automatic edit, as during a  
preview, on a monitor connected to the recorder you  
can monitor the following video and audio.  
• From the preroll point to the IN point, you can  
monitor the playback from the recorder.  
• From the IN point to the OUT point, you can monitor  
the playback from the player through the recorder in  
E-E mode.  
When you carry out automatic editing, the recorder  
and player operate as shown in the figure above, to  
copy the video and audio signals between the IN and  
OUT points on the player to the segment between the  
IN and OUT points on the recorder.  
• From the OUT point to the postroll point, you can  
monitor the playback from the recorder.  
5-8  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following figure illustrates this.  
Z
IN point  
OUT point  
Playback  
(recorder)  
Playback  
(recorder)  
E-E mode  
(player)  
Using a single monitor for video and audio  
on both player and recorder  
OUT button  
ENTRY button  
For efficient editing if only one monitor is available,  
use the following method.  
REVIEW button  
AUTO EDIT button  
PREVIEW button  
1 Connect the monitor to the recorder.  
To change the OUT point after starting  
automatic editing operation  
2 In the basic setup menu, set item 008 to AUTO.  
3 Press the PLAYER button on the recorder.  
After starting the automatic editing operation, to end  
the operation before the preset OUT point, hold down  
the ENTRY button and press the OUT button.  
The position where you pressed the button becomes  
the OUT point, and editing ends.  
This forces the recorder to E-E mode, in which the  
player video and audio signals are output to the  
monitor.  
To abandon automatic editing  
Note  
Press the STOP button.  
In insert editing to tape, it is necessary for audio,  
video, and CTL signals to be recorded in advance  
throughout the insert editing section on the tape. If you  
execute an insert edit over a section where these  
signals are not present, noise or breakup can occur in  
the audio and video when that section is played back.  
The automatic editing operation is abandoned. At the  
same time, the PREVIEW button and AUTO EDIT  
button start flashing, and the state before the editing  
was started is restored.  
In this case, the IN and OUT points already set are  
preserved so that you can carry out a preview or  
automatic editing operation again by pressing the  
PREVIEW button or AUTO EDIT button.  
Starting automatic editing  
Reviewing the editing results  
When you have set the edit points, press the flashing  
AUTO EDIT button.  
The AUTO EDIT button changes from flashing to  
continuously lit, and the automatic editing operation  
begins.  
After carrying out an editing operation, you can carry  
out a review, to check the editing results on the  
monitor.  
To carry out a review, after carrying out the edit, and  
before you set any new edit points or make other  
settings, press the REVIEW button.  
The REVIEW button lights, and the review is carried  
out.  
At the end of the editing operation, the AUTO EDIT  
button goes off.  
At the end of the review the REVIEW button goes off,  
and the tape returns to the OUT point.  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1 Automatic Editing  
After automatic editing, to adjust the edit  
points and reexecute the edit  
Hold down the DELETE button and press the ENTRY  
button to recall the edit points. After adjusting the edit  
points, press the AUTO EDIT button to carry out the  
edit again.  
For details of how to adjust edit points, see Section 5-1-5  
“Modifying and Deleting Edit Points” (page 5-6).  
5-10  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2 DMC Editing  
By controlling the player playback speed from the  
recorder you can achieve variable speed editing.  
5-2-1 Overview of DMC Editing  
Conditions for DMC editing  
DMC editing can be used for insert or assemble  
Tape movement during DMC editing  
The following figure illustrates how the tapes move on  
editing, but not for audio split editing.  
the player and recorder during DMC editing.  
Tape transport  
IN Point  
OUT Point  
Postroll  
Preroll  
Recorder  
DMC editing  
Playback  
Playback  
Stop  
Preroll time x  
initial speed  
Postroll time x  
final speed  
IN Point  
Player  
Time flow  
Stop  
Tape moves at  
initial speed  
Playback at stored  
varying speed  
Tape moves at  
final speed  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2 DMC Editing  
7 When the initial speed setting is complete, release  
5-2-2 Carrying Out DMC Editing  
the DMC EDIT button.  
8 Press the PREVIEW button.  
Setting the edit points and player speed  
The tape is prerolled and then the recorder starts  
operating at normal speed and the player at the set  
initial speed.  
Use the following procedure.  
Z
9 On passing the IN point, the MEMORY indicator  
begins to flash: turn the search dial to vary the  
playback speed.  
While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, the  
speed variations are stored in memory. On passing  
the OUT point, the MEMORY indicator changes  
from flashing to continuously lit, and the variable  
speed storing ends.  
2,6,7 8 4 1 5 3 6,9  
If the MEMORY indicator lights continuously  
before the OUT point  
This indicates that the memory became full at that  
point. Thus even before the OUT point is reached, it is  
not possible to record more speed variation.  
The maximum capacity is a duration of 120 seconds.  
1 Press the ASSEMBLE button or the desired  
INSERT button to select the editing mode.  
2 Press the DMC EDIT button.  
This unit switches to the DMC editing mode, and  
the DMC EDIT button lights.  
Quitting the DMC edit mode  
3 Press the RECORDER button.  
Press the DELETE button and DMC EDIT button  
simultaneously.  
4 Holding down the ENTRY button, press the IN or  
OUT button to set an edit point.  
5 Press the PLAYER button, to set the player IN  
Executing the DMC edit  
point.  
Press the AUTO EDIT button.  
Note  
DMC editing is carried out at the stored varying speed.  
Once the editing is carried out, the stored speed  
variation is lost from memory.  
It is not possible to set the player OUT point.  
6 Holding down the DMC EDIT button, turn the  
search dial, to set the initial speed.  
To select normal speed as the initial speed, press  
the PLAY button.  
To check the editing results  
Press the REVIEW button.  
The speed you set appears in the speed indication  
area.  
5-12  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3 Special Automatic Editing Methods  
This section describes the following automatic editing  
methods:  
5-3-2 Continuous Editing  
• Quick editing  
• Continuous editing  
• Standalone editing  
• Manual editing  
• Preread editing  
After an automatic editing operation, the recorder  
automatically returns to the OUT point. For the second  
and subsequent editing operations, you can continue  
editing by simply specifying the IN and OUT points on  
the player. In this case the current OUT point on the  
recorder becomes the new IN point.  
5-3-1 Quick Editing  
OUT point of preceding edit =  
IN point of current edit  
After selecting the edit mode, you can save on editing  
time by setting the edit points and executing the edit at  
the same time.  
Recorder  
Preceding edit segment  
Current edit segment  
For quick editing, use the following procedure.  
Player  
IN point  
OUT point  
Z
After automatic editing of one edit segment, to carry  
out continuous editing use the following procedure.  
1 Set the player IN and OUT points.  
2 3  
1
On the recorder the OUT point for the previous  
edit becomes the new IN point.  
1 When operating the player, press the PLAYER  
button, turning it on, and when operating the  
recorder, press the RECORDER button, turning it  
on, then stop the tapes on both the player and the  
recorder at the positions you wish to make the  
respective IN points.  
2 Press the PREVIEW button to carry out a preview.  
3 Press the AUTO EDIT button.  
This executes the edit.  
When the editing operation is completed, the  
recorder stops at the OUT point, and the player  
stops 2 seconds after the OUT point.  
2 Press the AUTO EDIT button.  
Editing starts.  
By repeating this process, you can carry out  
continuous editing.  
3 Watching the editing on the monitor, at the  
position you wish to make the OUT point, hold  
down the ENTRY button and press the OUT  
button.  
By setting setup menu item 326, you can make the preceding  
OUT point automatically become the new IN point.  
Editing ends.  
The point at which you started the editing becomes  
the IN point, and the point at which you ended the  
editing becomes the OUT point.  
If you want to preview  
In step 1, after setting the recorder or player IN point,  
press the PREVIEW button.  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3 Special Automatic Editing Methods  
5-3-3 Standalone Editing  
6 At the editing end point (the recorder OUT point),  
press the PLAY button.  
This refers to editing using as the player an external  
device which cannot be controlled remotely through  
the REMOTE1-IN(9P) connector. For example, you  
can record a color bar signal from a signal generator in  
the joints between the scenes of an already completed  
tape.  
Editing ends, and the recorder continues with  
playback.  
7 Press the STOP button to stop the recorder  
playback.  
Carrying out standalone editing  
Set the IN point with neither the PLAYER button or  
RECORDER button lit.  
5-3-5 Preread Editing  
Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the  
tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing.  
This type of editing is called “preread editing”, as this  
unit uses the preread heads to read the signals in  
advance from the tape.  
The AUTO EDIT button flashes, and it is now possible  
to carry out automatic editing.  
If necessary, you can also first set the OUT point.  
The signals read out can be send to a mixer for mixing,  
and can be recorded either on the original channels or  
on other digital audio channels.  
For preread editing, set the PREREAD to ON (see  
page 11-8).  
5-3-4 Manual Editing  
Use the following procedure to carry out manual  
editing.  
1 Press the RECORDER button, turning it on.  
Audio source  
2 Use the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to find  
the editing start point (the recorder IN point), and  
stop the tape just before this point.  
Digital or analog  
audio output  
Audio mixer  
Note  
Digital or analog  
Audio input  
If the recorder is in stop mode, then when editing  
starts this section of the video will break up.  
75Ω  
75Ω  
3 Select the editing mode.  
4 Press the PLAY button.  
The recorder begins playback.  
Digital or analog  
video output  
Note  
Digital or analog  
video input  
It takes about two seconds until the playback video  
stabilizes. For this reason, start the playback from  
before the segment of video you wish to use.  
Video switcher  
Video source  
5 At the editing start point (the recorder IN point),  
press the EDIT button and PLAY button  
simultaneously.  
Editing starts.  
5-14  
Chapter 5 Editing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
• In preread editing, if an input video signal is used as  
the reference signal for the output video signal, this  
forms a feedback loop. To prevent the occurrence of  
feedback, set the OUTREF in function menu page 4  
to REF, and set item 309 in the extended setup menu  
to AUTO 1 so as to use an external reference signal.  
• When the preread mode is selected, to prevent  
feedback due to the loop connection, whatever the  
editing mode of this unit, no E-E video output is  
available.  
When the PREREAD is set to OFF after preread  
editing, however, if the loop connection remains and  
an E-E signal is output, feedback will occur.  
To prevent this, select PB mode for the video and  
digital audio channels in all the modes before the  
preread editing, as follows.  
1 Set PB/EE in function menu HOME page to PB.  
2 Set the PREREAD in function menu page 4 to ON.  
3 Make the necessary connections for the preread  
editing.  
4 After selecting the desired insert editing mode,  
carry out the preread editing.  
5 When the preread editing is completed, remove the  
connections.  
6 Set the PREREAD to OFF.  
7 Check that no loop connection remains.  
Chapter 5 Editing  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1 Overview  
This unit can record shot marks or use shot marks  
recorded in digital Betacam, MPEG IMX, or Betacam  
SX format.  
Shot marks are indications at desired points on a tape  
which enable faster cueing.  
Types of shot mark  
This unit supports the following three types of shot  
mark. This chapter describes recording start marks and  
post marks, treating them as varieties of shot marks.  
Shot mark type  
Writing on a camcorder, Writing on this unit  
etc.  
Modifying and  
erasing on this unit  
Recording start mark Automatically written at the Written or not according to a separate menu  
Possible  
start of recording.  
setting for each recording mode (crash recording,  
assemble editing, insert editing).  
For each mode for which the setting is “ON”, the  
mark is written automatically at the start of  
recording.  
Shot mark 1 and  
shot mark 2  
Written by a manual shot  
mark operation during  
recording or editing.  
Written by a button operation during crash  
recording or assemble editing. A menu setting  
determines which of three types of mark is  
written: shot mark 1, shot mark 2, or post mark.  
Written by a button operation during playback,  
while stopped, during a search, or during  
recording (crash recording or assemble editing).  
Post mark  
Not written  
(Written only on this unit)  
First, the shot mark functions of this unit are described  
in simple terms.  
Cueing up to shot marks  
By selecting a desired shot mark from the shot mark  
list, you can cue up immediately to that position. By  
means of a button operation, you can also cue up to the  
shot marks adjacent to the current tape position (index  
function).  
Reading shot marks  
This unit reads in shot marks written on a tape and  
stores them in memory. (To a maximum of 200)  
Once this data is stored in this unit, it is preserved even  
when the power is turned off.  
Shot data display  
When the tape includes shot data (camera, time, and  
other information captured at the time of shooting),  
you can read this in, and display the details on a  
monitor. It is also possible to display the shot mark list  
and shot data simultaneously.  
Writing and erasing shot marks  
For recording start marks, a menu setting determines  
whether or not they are written each time recording  
starts. Shot mark 1, shot mark 2, and post mark types  
can be written at any point on a tape, and also erased  
or rewritten.  
Sorting shot marks by cassette  
When the tape includes shot data, this unit recognizes  
which cassette each shot mark comes from. You can  
therefore sort the read-in shot marks by cassette in  
time code order.  
Shot mark list operations  
On the monitor, you can display a list of the shot  
marks read in by this unit, select required shot marks,  
delete shot marks, and so on. You can also add a  
memo mark (#) to a shot mark in the list.  
During tape playback, you can add virtual shot marks  
to the list. This is not written on the tape itself.  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1  
6-1 Overview  
6-2 Shot Mark Operation Menu  
This section describes the settings in the shot mark  
operation menu.  
Details of the shot mark operation menu  
The shot mark operation menu comprises four items,  
G01 to G04. The detailed contents appear in the  
following table.  
Displaying the shot mark operation menu  
With the function menu HOME page showing in the  
menu display, hold down the MARK button, and press  
the F5 (MENU) button.  
Item  
Item name  
Settings  
number  
G01  
SEARCH  
TYPE  
Select which shot mark type the  
index function searches for,  
from the following possibilities:  
all  
rec start mark  
Z
shot mark 1  
shot mark 2  
post mark  
G02  
G03  
G04  
LISTING TYPE For each type of shot mark,  
select whether to read into the  
list (ON) or not read (OFF):  
rec start mark  
shot mark 1  
shot mark 2  
post mark  
F5 (MENU) button  
MARK button  
For each type of recording,  
select whether to write recording  
start marks (ON) or not write  
them (OFF):  
RS.MARK  
MODE  
The following menu appears on the monitor.  
SHOT MARKER  
crash rec: crash recording  
assemble: assemble editing  
insert: insert editing  
GO1:SEARCH TYPE - all  
GO2:LISTING TYPE  
GO3:RS.MARK MODE  
Select the type of shot mark to  
write during recording and  
assemble editing.  
shot mark 1  
MARK IN REC  
GO4:MARK IN REC shot1  
shot mark 2  
post mark  
Changing the menu settings  
The basic procedure for accessing menu items and  
changing settings is the same as for the setup menus.  
Note, however, the operations in “To change the  
settings of menu items with sub-items” (page 12-3) for  
items G02 and G03.  
For details of the setup menu configuration and operations,  
see Section 12-1 “Setup Menu Configuration” (page 12-1)  
and Section 12-2 “Setup Menu Operations”(page 12-2),  
respectively.  
6-2  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3 Shot Mark Operations  
This section describes the operations concerning  
reading and writing shot marks. Note that the  
following operations cannot be carried out by remote  
control.  
Reading shot marks from more than one  
cassette  
After changing the cassettes, carry out the reading  
operation again.  
Data written in the new cassette will be added as long  
as the total does not exceed 200 shot marks. For  
example, if 190 shot marks have already read in, only  
10 shot marks will be read from the new tape.  
In the shot mark list (see page 6-5) the data from  
different cassettes is separated by a row of dashes.  
6-3-1 Reading Shot Marks  
To read in shot marks  
With a cassette loaded, hold down the LIST button and  
press the F FWD or REW button.  
6-3-2 Writing Shot Marks  
Z
Writing recording start marks during  
recording  
In item G03 of the shot mark operation menu (page  
6-2), for each of the three recording modes (crash  
recording, assemble editing, and insert editing), select  
whether or not to write recording start mark.  
When you set a particular mode to “ON”, a recording  
start mark is written on the tape each time you start  
recording in that mode.  
F FWD button  
REW button  
LIST button  
Note  
While the shot marks are being read in, the F FWD or  
REW button flashes.  
The unit searches to the end of the tape, then rewinds  
automatically.  
For insert mode, press the TC button to turn the  
indicator on.  
Writing shot mark 1, shot mark 2, or post  
marks  
For the procedure for listing the shot marks read in, see  
page 6-4.  
Note  
Selecting the type of shot mark written  
In item G04 of the shot mark operation menu (page  
6-2), select one of shot mark 1, shot mark 2, and post  
mark.  
It is only possible to read in a maximum of 200 shot  
marks.  
When 200 shot marks have been read in, the control  
panel display shows the message “S-LIST FULL”, and  
the reading stops.  
Note  
If any of the settings (to write a recording start mark)  
in item G03 of the shot mark operation menu are set to  
“ON,” then for 20 frames from each recording,  
assemble editing, or insert editing start, the user bits  
are overwritten with the shot mark data.  
To cancel the message, press one of the tape transport  
buttons.  
To stop reading  
Press the STOP button.  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
6-3 Shot Mark Operations  
To write in crash recording or assemble  
editing  
Erasing a shot mark  
Select the shot mark from the shot mark list, and then  
carry out the deletion operation.  
1 Hold the MARK button down for at least 2  
seconds.  
For details of the procedure, see page 6-6.  
2 At the position you wish to write the mark, hold  
down the ENTRY button, and press the MARK  
button.  
6-3-3 Shot Mark List Operations  
A mark of the type selected in item G04 of the shot  
mark operation menu is written.  
Displaying the shot mark list  
Hold down the ENTRY button and press the LIST  
button.  
Z
Z
ENTRY button  
MARK button  
REC/ERASE indicator  
ENTRY button  
LIST button  
Writing during playback, while stopped, or  
during a search  
When this unit is in any of the playback, stop, or  
search modes, you can write a post mark only.  
All of the shot mark types for which item G02 in the  
shot mark operation menu is set to “ON” appear in the  
list. If you do the same operation again, the list display  
disappears.  
1 Hold the MARK button down for at least 2  
seconds.  
While the shot mark list is displayed, the function  
menu display changes as follows.  
The REC/ERASE indicator lights.  
SHT  
2 At the position you wish to write the mark, hold  
down the ENTRY button and press the MARK  
button.  
MRK MEMO SELECT DELETE  
SETING  
EXIT  
A post mark is written the instant you pressed the  
MARK button.  
While the mark is being written, the message  
“RECORD SHOT MARK” appears on the  
monitor, and the REC/ERASE indicator flashes.  
6-4  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A virtual shot mark appears on the monitor as “V-  
MARK xxx” (xxx is the number). This is not written to  
the tape.  
Example of list display  
The following figure shows how the list is organized.  
After entering a virtual shot mark, if you change the  
cassette or power the unit off, it appears in the list as  
the first shot mark of the next group read in.  
Shot mark number of current cursor  
position / total number of stored shot  
marks  
Separator  
between read-in  
groups of shot  
marks  
SHOT MARKER  
(011/180)  
Adding a memo mark (#)  
NO.  
----------------------------  
*011 S1 10:04:05:11  
012 R 10:05:35:24  
013 V 10:07:05:02  
----------------------------  
014 R 10:08:35:04  
015 S2 10:09:05:11  
016 R 10:10:35:24  
TIME CODE  
Select the shot mark to which you wish to add the  
memo mark, then press the F1 (MEMO) button.  
Repeat this operation to remove a memo mark.  
Cursor (current  
shot mark position)  
Position in list  
Selecting the types of shot mark to be  
read in the list  
017 #R 10:10:36:00  
Time code  
For each of the types of shot mark (recording start  
mark, shot mark 1, shot mark 2, and post mark) you  
can specify whether it is read in.  
In item G02 of the shot mark operation menu, set the  
required types to “ON”.  
Shot mark type  
R: recording start mark  
S1: shot mark 1  
S2: shot mark 2  
V: virtual shot mark  
P: post mark  
#: memo mark  
For details of the menu, see page 6-2.  
Selecting a shot mark  
You can also use the following procedure.  
Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob to align the asterisk  
cursor with the desired shot mark.  
1 With the shot mark list displayed, press the F5  
(SETING) button.  
You can now select the shot mark types.  
The function menu display changes as follows.  
SHT  
Entering virtual shot marks  
When the REC/ERASE indicator is off, hold down the  
ENTRY button and press the MARK button.  
MRK PREV  
NEXT  
OFF  
ON  
EXIT  
2 Press the F1 (PREV) or F2 (NEXT) button to  
select a shot mark type.  
Z
3 Press the F4 (ON) or F3 (OFF) button to switch  
between ON (displayed) and OFF (not displayed).  
4 To return to the shot mark list, press the F6 (EXIT)  
button.  
ENTRY button  
MARK button  
Deleting a shot mark from the list  
To delete a shot mark or the shot mark list, you can use  
the F2 (SELECT) button instead of the MARK button,  
and the F3 (DELETE) button instead of the DELETE  
button.  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
6-3 Shot Mark Operations  
To delete an individual shot mark  
Use the following procedure.  
1 With no shot mark list displayed, hold the MARK  
button down for at least 2 seconds.  
The REC/ERASE indicator lights, indicating that  
you can rewrite or erase shot marks.  
Z
2 Display the shot mark list.  
3 Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob to select on the  
list the shot mark you wish to erase.  
4 Press the DELETE button and MARK button  
simultaneously.  
3
2 1  
During the erasure process the message “ERASE  
SHOT MARK” appears, and the REC/ERASE  
indicator flashes.  
1 With the shot mark list displayed, select the shot  
mark to be deleted using the MULTI CONTROL  
knob.  
5 When the shot mark has been erased, close the shot  
mark list.  
2 Hold the MARK button down.  
6 Hold down the MARK button for at least 2  
While you hold down the button, an “X” appears  
after the selected shot mark number, indicating that  
it will be deleted.  
seconds, to turn off the REC/ERASE indicator.  
6-3-4 Cueing Up to Shot Marks  
To delete more than one shot mark, while holding  
down the MARK button turn the MULTI  
CONTROL knob to select all of the shot marks.  
Cueing up to a selected shot mark  
3 With the MARK button held down, press the  
Use the following procedure.  
DELETE button.  
This deletes the shot marks which were marked by  
an “X”.  
Z
To delete the entire list  
Hold down the DELETE button and press the LIST  
button.  
This deletes all shot marks from the list. This does not  
erase marks from the tape.  
MARK button  
2
1
Erasing shot marks from the tape  
F FWD button  
To erase a shot mark, use the following procedure.  
REW button  
Note  
1 Select the desired shot mark from the shot mark  
Once you erase a shot mark from the tape, it cannot be  
read back in.  
list.  
2 Press the PREROLL button.  
6-6  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The tape is played back, and the shot data displayed.  
Cueing up to shot marks adjacent to the  
current tape position (index function)  
To delete the shot data  
Once again hold down the ENTRY button, and press  
the PLAY button.  
1 In item G01 of the shot mark operation menu  
(page 6-2), select one of recording start mark, shot  
mark 1, shot mark 2, and post mark, or select all.  
Example of shot data display  
2 Holding down the MARK button, press the F FWD  
button or REW button.  
The shot data display appears as shown below.  
While the tape is moving the F FWD button or  
REW button flashes.  
MODEL NAME DNW 0090  
SERIAL NUMBER 010001  
DATE  
TIME  
CASSETTE NUMBER 0095  
SHOT NUMBER 0052  
1998.05.11  
12.55.10  
When the shot mark is detected, its type is  
displayed in time data display area 2 on the lower  
control panel and in the character information  
display on the monitor screen.  
ID1  
ID2  
ID3  
ID4  
AAAAAAAAAAAA  
BBBBBBBBBBBB  
CCCCCCCCCCCC  
DDDDDDDDDDDD  
Camera IDs  
Recording  
time code  
TCR 23:59:59:29  
For details of character information display on the  
monitor screen, see F4 (CHARA) in function menu page  
4 (page 11-7) and setup menu item 005 (page 12-5).  
The details in the shot data depend on the shooting  
conditions. If because of the devices used there is no  
shot data on a part of the tape, it appears as blank.  
Note  
You cannot use the above procedure to cue up to a  
virtual shot mark.  
Displaying the shot data on the shot mark  
list  
6-3-5 Reading In Shot Data  
When there is shot data (time, device, and other  
information about the shooting) written on the tape,  
you can read it in and display it on the monitor.  
Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob to position the  
cursor on a separator in the shot mark list.  
If there is shot data recorded when the immediately  
following shot mark was written, it appears in the  
display as shown below.  
Displaying the shot data  
Holding down the ENTRY button, press the PLAY  
button.  
Model name (4 characters)  
Model number (4 digits)  
Serial number (6 digits)  
Cassette number (4 digits)  
Z
SHOT MARK  
(---/180)  
NO. TIME CODE  
Shot data  
*012345-DNW_-0123-4567-  
011 S1 10:04:05:11  
012 R 10:05:35:24  
013 V 10:07:05:02  
----------------------------  
014 R 10:08:35:04  
015 S2 10:09:05:11  
016 R 10:10:35:24  
017 R 10:10:36:00  
First shot  
mark in the  
group  
PLAY button  
ENTRY button  
You can sort the shot marks in the list, based on the shot  
data. For details, see the next section.  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
6-3 Shot Mark Operations  
6-3-6 Sorting Shot Marks  
1 With the shot mark list displayed, press the F5  
(SETING) button.  
Based on shot data recorded on the tape, you can  
separate the shot marks by cassette, and sort them in  
time code sequence.  
2 Press the F2 (NEXT) button, and select SORTING  
LIST.  
3 Press the F4 (ON) button to change the setting to  
To sort the shot marks  
Use the following procedure.  
ON.  
Sorting starts. When it ends, the setting indication  
returns to OFF.  
Z
For example, if shot marks have been read in twice  
from the same cassette, these can be collated as shown  
in the following figure.  
2 3  
1
After sorting  
Before sorting  
SHOT MARKER  
(---/180)  
TIME CODE  
SHOT MARKER  
(---/180)  
TIME CODE  
NO.  
NO.  
*012345-DNW_-0123-4567-  
011 S1 10:04:05:11  
*012345-DNW_-0123-4567-  
011 S1 10:04:05:11  
Cassette 1  
Cassette 1  
Cassette 3  
----------------------------  
----------------------------  
012 S2 10:09:05:11  
012 V  
013 R  
----------------------------  
014 S2 10:09:05:11  
015 R 10:10:35:24  
016 R 10:10:36:00  
----------------------------  
017 R 10:05:35:24  
10:07:05:02  
Cassette 2 (first time)  
10:08:35:04  
013 R  
014 R  
----------------------------  
10:10:35:24  
10:10:36:00  
Cassette 3  
015 R  
016 V  
017 R  
10:05:35:24  
10:07:05:02  
10:08:35:04  
Cassette 2 (first and second  
times)  
Cassette 2 (second time)  
Shot marks from the cassette 2 read in twice are  
collated, and arranged in time code sequence.  
6-8  
Chapter 6 Shot Mark Function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1 Overview of Tele-File Functions  
Tele-File is a non-contact data carrier system.  
Data management in clip units  
Tele-File increases the efficiency of data management  
and operations such as recording, playback, and  
editing by enabling information to be exchanged  
between VTRs with data reading and writing functions  
and cassettes with Tele-File labels.  
In Tele-File, data is managed in units called “clips.” A  
clip consists of the following data items, whose  
settings can be displayed and changed.  
• Cue point  
• Write protect  
• Mark  
• Recording start point  
• IN point  
• OUT point  
• Take number  
• Cut number  
• Scene number  
• Comment  
Memory label  
Newly developed IC  
Data library management with handy  
reader/writer  
The Tele-File system employs a newly developed  
memory IC with the following features.  
• Thin design: With a thickness of 0.5 mm, the IC can  
be attached to cassettes as a memory label.  
• Memory capacity: 1 KB (user area, rewritable)  
• Data transfer speed: 100 kbps  
An optional handy reader/writer (supporting Memory  
Stick) is available to facilitate data library  
management.  
• Security functions: Reading and writing  
authorization can be controlled through multiple  
passwords and permission settings.  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1 Overview of Tele-File Functions  
7-2 Opening the Tele-File Menu  
To open from the function menu  
Configuration of the Tele-File menu  
Display page 5 of the function menu in the menu  
display section, and then press the F1 (TELE-F)  
button.  
The Tele-File menu has a tree structure, as illustrated  
below.  
When the menu first opens, the menu operation mode  
is clip data display mode.  
The Tele-File menu opens.  
[Tele-File menu]  
For details about the function menu, see Chapter 11  
“Function Menu” (page 11-1).  
Clip data display mode  
Attribute data display/  
modify mode  
Clip data modify mode  
Undo check mode  
To open automatically  
When setup menu item 134 is set to ON, and when the  
current function menu page is HOME, HOME2, or  
page 1 to page 5, the Tele-File menu opens  
automatically whenever a Tele-File label is detected on  
a cassette loaded into the VTR.  
For details about setup menu item 134, see Section 12-4  
“Items in the Extended Setup Menu” (page 12-8).  
7-2  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
7-3-1 Clip Data Display  
For more information about how to display menus on the  
monitor, see the section “To display menus on the monitor”  
(page 12-2).  
Shown below are examples of the default menu  
displays in the menu display section and the monitor  
display.  
Menu display section  
Tele-File menu indicator  
Data type indicator  
Setting display area  
TEL Cue  
E-F ATTRIB SELECT  
UNDO WR/EXT  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Menu items (functions)  
Title  
Monitor display  
Final data recording date  
Number of selected clip  
TELE-FILE : TEST 01  
2001/07/21  
Cue Point  
Remaining memory percentage a)  
No. 0001 48%  
WP Mark R  
Data type  
*00:00:02:10 ON KEEP  
00:00:31:10  
00:00:57:10  
@
Clip No. 0001  
Clip No. 0002  
Clip No. 0003  
·
·
·
a) The Tele-File memory always contains the attribute data so that this indication never shows “100%.”  
Tele-File menu indicator  
Cue: Cue point  
Indicates that the menu display section is currently  
displaying the Tele-File menu.  
Protct: Write protected  
Mark: Mark  
R-Strt: Recording start point  
IN: IN point  
Data type indicator  
Indicates the type of data selected with the clip data  
display mode. There are the following types.  
OUT: OUT point  
Take: Take number  
Cut: Cut number  
Scene: Scene number  
Comnt: Comment  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
Setting display area  
Displays the setting of the currently selected data type,  
Menu items (functions)  
Display menu items (functions).  
and a cursor (“*” or “>”).  
These are common for all of the data items in clip data  
display mode. The function assignments for each item  
are as follows.  
The meaning of the cursor symbols is as follows:  
*: Indicates that the mode is clip data display mode or  
attribute data display/modify mode, and that data is  
selected.  
>: Indicates that the mode is clip data modify mode or  
attribute data display/modify mode, and prompts for  
data entry or modification.  
Clip data display mode menu items  
Item name  
Function  
Selects attribute data display/modify mode.  
F1 (ATTRIB)  
For details about attribute data display/modify mode, see Section 7-3-5 “Displaying and Modifying  
Attribute Data” (page 7-11).  
F2 (SELECT)  
Selects a data modification mode for the data selected in the clip. The cursor changes from “*” to “>”.  
Note  
In the following cases, the SELECT item does not appear, and it is not possible to select a data  
modification mode.  
• When setup menu item 133 is set to REMOTE  
• When the memory label itself is write protected  
For more information about clip data modifications, see Section 7-3-3 “Modifying Clip Data” (page 7-7).  
Selects data in a clip.  
F3 (T)  
With each press, the “*” cursor moves to select the previous data item. The display scrolls to the left  
when the cursor moves to data that is not currently displayed.  
F4 (t)  
Selects data in a clip.  
With each press, the “*” cursor moves to select the next data item. The display scrolls to the right when  
the cursor moves to data that is not currently displayed.  
F5 (UNDO)  
Selects undo check mode. This button appears and is enabled when data has been modified after being  
read from the Tele-File label.  
For more information about undo check mode, see Section 7-3-4 “Undo/Resume Functions” (page 7-10).  
Writes data and exits from the Tele-File menu (return to function menu page 5).  
F6 (WR/EXT)  
Note  
If you attempt to change clip data that is write-  
protected, the message “PROTECTED CLIP!”  
appears, and it is not possible to change the data.  
Remove the write-protect setting (see page 7-9).  
7-4  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Title  
To select clips  
The title (maximum 14 characters) set in attribute data  
display/modify mode.  
Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob in clip data  
display mode.  
The data for the selected clip appears in the menu  
display section, where it is selected.  
In the monitor display, the “*” cursor moves up and  
down as clips are selected.  
Selected clip number  
A 4-digit number representing the number of the  
selected clip (with the “*” cursor).  
Remaining memory percentage  
The percentage of remaining memory (user area)  
available for use.  
Data which is not visible is selected and displayed  
after scrolling.  
If there is not sufficient free memory, the message <<  
MEMORY FULL!!>> appears (stays lit for three  
seconds) in time data display area 2 when you attempt  
to add data.  
TELE-FILE : TEST 01  
2001/07/21  
Cue Point  
No. 0001 48%  
WP Mark R  
00:00:02:10 ON KEEP  
*00:00:31:10  
00:00:57:10  
@
Cursor  
Final data recording date  
The data (year/month/day) on which data was most  
recently recorded.  
Data type  
The data type. The displayed data is the same as the  
data displayed in the menu display section, but some  
of the captions are different. There are the following  
types.  
To select data in a clip  
Cue Point: Cue point  
WP: Write protected  
Mark: Mark  
In clip data display mode, press the F3 (T) or F4 (t)  
button.  
R: Recording start point  
IN Point: IN point  
OUT Point: OUT point  
Tk: Take number  
The “*” cursor moves and data is selected. Data which  
is not visible is selected and displayed after scrolling.  
Cut: Cut number  
Scn: Scene number  
Comment: Comment  
TELE-FILE : TEST 01  
2001/07/21  
Cue Point  
No. 0001 48%  
WP Mark R  
(Scrolling)  
00:00:02:10 *ON KEEP  
00:00:31:10  
00:00:57:10  
@
Clip data No. 0001...  
Data is displayed for 1 clip per line.  
Clips are assigned continuous numbers, beginning with  
No. 0001 for the clip on the top line.  
Cursor  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
Moving the cursor directly  
To cue up the cue point, IN point, or OUT  
point  
Regardless of the cursor’s current position, pressing  
one of the following buttons moves the cursor directly  
to the specified position in the same clip and displays  
the data.  
IN (video IN point) button: IN point data  
OUT (video OUT point) button: OUT point data  
MARK button: Cue point data  
1 Select a clip.  
2 Press the PREROLL button while holding down  
the IN (video IN point), OUT (video OUT point),  
or MARK button.  
The unit exits from the Tele-File menu and cues up  
the position of the data selected in step 2 (the cue  
point position if the MARK button was pressed).  
To display the duration  
Press the IN (video IN point) and OUT (video OUT  
point) buttons simultaneously. The cursor moves to the  
IN point data of the same clip, and the duration  
appears while the buttons are held down. If there is no  
IN point or OUT point data, the duration is displayed  
as 0:00:00:00.  
Note  
The unit does not preroll if there is no data for the  
selected point.  
7-3-2 Preroll and Cue Up Using  
Clip Data  
In clip data display mode, you can use clip data to  
preroll and cue up.  
To preroll to the cue point, IN point, or  
OUT point  
1 Select a clip.  
2 Select the cue point, the IN point, or the OUT  
point.  
3 Press the PREROLL button.  
The unit exits from the Tele-File menu and prerolls  
to the position of the selected data.  
The preroll time is according to the setting of setup  
menu item 001.  
Note  
The unit does not preroll if there is no data for the  
selected point.  
7-6  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3-3 Modifying Clip Data  
To modify clip data, put the unit into clip data display  
mode and then press the F2 (SELECT) button to put it  
into clip data modification mode (the cursor changes to  
“>”).  
The function assignments for menu items in clip data  
modification mode are as follows.  
Clip data modification mode menu items  
Item name  
Function  
Returns to clip data display mode.  
F1 (RETURN)  
F2 (MODIFY)  
Changes the setting of the selected data, or makes a new setting.  
The function button changes according to the data type.  
See the following for more information about how to set the various data types.  
• Cue point, IN point, OUT point: “To set time code data” (page 7-8)  
• Write protect, mark, recording start point: “To make write protect, mark, and recording start point  
settings” (page 7-9)  
• Take number, cut number, scene number: “To make take number, cut number, and scene number  
settings” (page 7-9)  
• Comment: “To make comment settings” (page 7-10)  
F3 (DELETE)  
Deletes the data setting value. Enabled when cue point, IN point, OUT point, take number, cut number,  
scene number, or comment data is selected.  
A confirmation message appears. Press one of the following buttons to confirm or cancel the operation.  
• F1 (CANCEL): Cancels the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
• F2 (OK): Executes the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
F4 (DEL LN)  
F5 (INS LN)  
Deletes the selected clip.  
A confirmation message appears. Press one of the following buttons to confirm or cancel the operation.  
• F1 (CANCEL): Cancels the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
• F2 (OK): Executes the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
Inserts a clip at the cursor position.  
A confirmation message appears. Press one of the following buttons to confirm or cancel the operation.  
• F1 (CANCEL): Cancels the insertion and returns to clip data display mode.  
• F2 (OK): Executes the insertion and returns to clip data display mode.  
HOME + F4  
(DELETE ALL)  
Deletes all clips.  
A confirmation message appears. Press one of the following buttons to confirm or cancel the operation.  
• F1 (CANCEL): Cancels the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
• F2 (OK): Executes the deletion and returns to clip data display mode.  
Note  
If you attempt to change clip data that is write-  
protected, the message “PROTECTED CLIP!”  
appears, and it is not possible to change the data.  
Remove the write-protect setting (see page 7-9).  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
To add and delete clips  
To add clips  
To set time code data  
Proceed as follows to make or change settings for cue  
point, IN point, and OUT point data.  
1 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to move the  
“*” cursor to the position where you want to insert  
the clip.  
1 Select a clip.  
2 Select cue point, IN point, or OUT point.  
3 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
4 Press the F2 (MODIFY) button.  
2 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
3 Press the F5 (INS LN) button.  
A confirmation message “INSERT CLIP OK?”  
appears.  
The two most significant digits begin to flash, and  
the data can be set or modified.  
4 Press the F2 (OK) button.  
5 Press the F3 (T) or F4 (t) button until the digit  
The clip is added at the position to which you  
that you want to set starts flashing.  
moved the cursor in step 1.  
6 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to make the  
To delete clips  
setting.  
1 Select the clip to delete.  
To display the offset from the previous setting  
value  
2 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
3 Press the F4 (DEL LN) button.  
The offset is displayed as long as you hold down  
the F2 (OFFSET) button.  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have set all the  
required digits.  
A confirmation message “DELETE THIS CLIP  
OK?” appears.  
8 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
The setting is confirmed and the unit returns to clip  
data display mode.  
4 Press the F2 (OK) button.  
The clip selected in step 1 is deleted.  
To cancel the setting or modification and return  
to clip data display mode  
Press the F1 (CANCEL) button.  
7-8  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set the set or modified data as other time  
data  
To make take number, cut number, and  
scene number settings  
Press the F6 (SET TO) button and select the time  
data (cue point, IN point, or OUT point), and then  
press the F5 (SET) or F6 (SET NL) button. The  
position where the data is set differs as follows,  
depending on the button pressed.  
• F5 (SET): The data is set in the selected time  
data position.  
• F6 (SET NL): A new clip is added at the lowest  
line and the time data is set at the selected data  
position in the new clip.  
Proceed as follows to make take number, cut number,  
and scene number settings.  
1 Select a clip.  
2 Select take number, cut number, or scene number.  
3 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
4 Press the F2 (MODIFY) button.  
To make write protect, mark, and  
recording start point settings  
The most significant digit begins to flash, and the  
data can be set.  
Proceed as follows to make write protect, mark, and  
recording start point settings.  
5 Press the F3 (T) or F4 (t) button until the digit  
1 Select a clip.  
that you want to set starts flashing.  
2 Select write protect, mark, or recording start point.  
3 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
4 Press the F2 (MODIFY) button.  
6 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to make the  
setting.  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have set all the  
required digits.  
8 Press the F2 (SET) button.  
The data entry area begins to flash, and the data  
can be set.  
The setting is confirmed and the unit returns to clip  
data display mode.  
5 Select the data by pressing the F3 (+) or F4 (–)  
button or rotating the MULTI CONTROL knob.  
6 Press the F2 (SET) button.  
The data setting is confirmed and the unit returns  
to clip data display mode.  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
To make comment settings  
Proceed as follows to make comment settings.  
1 Select a clip.  
7-3-4 Undo/Resume Functions  
Undo function  
The undo function cancels all modifications and  
returns the data to the state it was in when first read.  
Press the F5 (UNDO) button in clip data display mode.  
A confirmation message appears. Press the F2 (OK)  
button to execute the undo and cancel all modifications  
to the data.  
2 Select comment.  
3 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The unit enters clip data modification mode.  
4 Press the F2 (MODIFY) button.  
Resume function  
If you have not modified any data since the last  
execution of the undo function, you can press the F5  
(UNDO) button again. The button functions as a  
resume button, which cancels the immediately  
preceding undo.  
The data entry area begins to flash, and the data  
can be set.  
Press the F5 (UNDO) button in clip data display mode.  
A confirmation message appears. Press the F2 (OK)  
button to execute the resume and cancel the  
immediately preceding undo.  
5 Enter a character by rotating the MULTI  
CONTROL knob.  
6 Press F4 (t) button to move to the next character  
place.  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have entered the  
entire comment.  
To delete characters  
Press the F3 (T) or F4 (t) button until the  
character that you want to delete starts flashing,  
and then press the F5 (DELETE) button.  
To insert characters  
Press the F3 (T) or F4 (t) button until the  
character place after the place where you want to  
insert starts flashing, and then press the F6  
(INSERT) button.  
8 Press the F2 (OK) button.  
The comment is confirmed and the unit returns to  
clip data display mode.  
7-10  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3-5 Displaying and Modifying Attribute Data  
You can display and modify attribute data. The  
example below shows attribute data displayed on the  
monitor.  
Video final recording date  
Title  
ID  
TELE-FILE INFORMATION  
*REC DATE 2001/07/21  
TITLE TEST 01  
ID  
Administrator data  
Model name  
ADMIN  
MODEL  
SERIAL 00000  
Serial number  
Write inhibit setting  
Thread count  
WRITE INHIBIT OFF  
THREAD COUNT 00012  
CUE POINT No. 0003  
CONTROL MODE panel  
SIZE 01024 USED 0270  
Number of cue points  
Control mode  
Memory size  
Amount of memory used  
Video final recording date  
The most recent date (year/month/day) on which video  
Write inhibit setting  
Whether the entire Tele-File is write inhibited.  
was recorded on the tape.  
The write inhibit setting can be modified.  
Title  
Thread count  
The thread count value recorded on the tape.  
The title (name assigned to Tele-File, etc., maximum  
24 characters).  
Number of cue points  
The title can be modified.  
The number of cue points recorded in the Tele-File.  
You can check the cue point values in clip data display  
mode.  
ID  
The ID (unique number assigned to Tele-File,  
maximum 24 characters).  
The ID can be modified.  
Control mode  
The setting of setup menu item 133.  
Administrator data  
For more information about setup menu item 133, see page  
12-11.  
Data about the administrator of the cassette or tape  
material (maximum 16 characters).  
The administrator data can be modified.  
Memory size  
The size of the memory in the Tele-File (unit: bytes).  
Model name  
The model name of the VTR that recorded most  
recently to the tape.  
Amount of memory used  
The amount of memory currently being used (unit:  
bytes).  
Serial number  
The serial number of the VTR that recorded most  
recently to the tape.  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3 Tele-File Menu  
2 Press the F2 (OK) button.  
To modify attribute data  
All modifiable data is erased.  
You can modify the title, ID, administrator data, and  
write inhibit setting attributes.  
However, the attributes cannot be modified when the  
write inhibit setting is ON. Proceed as follows after  
setting the write inhibit setting to OFF.  
Note  
In the following cases, the FORMAT item does not  
appear, and it is not possible to select a data  
modification mode.  
• When setup menu item 133 is set to REMOTE  
• When the memory label itself is write protected  
1 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to select the  
item.  
The F2 (SELECT) button is enabled when you  
select an item that can be modified (title, ID,  
administrator data, and write inhibit setting).  
2 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The data can be set or modified.  
3 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to set or  
modify the data.  
4 Press the F2 (SET) button.  
The change to the setting is confirmed.  
Note  
In the following cases, the SELECT item does not  
appear, and it is not possible to select a data  
modification mode.  
• When setup menu item 133 is set to REMOTE  
• When the memory label itself is write protected  
To format the Tele-File memory  
You can format the Tele-File memory (erase all  
modifiable data). However, the memory cannot be  
formatted in the following cases.  
• When the write inhibit setting is ON  
• When the control protocol is “remote”  
To format Tele-File memory, proceed as follows.  
1 Press the F4 (FORMAT) button.  
A confirmation message appears.  
7-12  
Chapter 7 Tele-File  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1 Overview of UMID Functions  
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a type of  
meta-data in video and audio materials. It has been  
internationally standardized in SMPTE Standard  
330M. This unit supports recording and generation of  
UMIDs.  
The UMID is made up of a section called the “Basic”  
section and a section called the “Source Pack” section.  
The Basic section contains information such as the  
device that recorded the material and whether the  
material is the original or a copy. The Source Pack  
section contains information about when/where/who  
recorded the material.  
A UMID with a Basic section only is called a Basic  
UMID. A UMID with both Basic and Source Pack  
sections is called an Extended UMID. The following  
figure shows a general overview of the information  
contained in a UMID.  
UMID  
Basic  
Instance Number  
Copy or original  
Material Number  
Which device recorded the original  
Source Pack  
Date/Time  
When was it recorded  
Spatial Co-ordinates  
Where was it recorded  
Stored Ownership  
Who recorded it  
Chapter 8 UMID Functions  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1 Overview of UMID Functions  
8-2 Recording UMIDs  
UMIDs can be recorded when recording video signals  
with this unit. You can select whether to inherit (copy)  
the UMID contained in input signals, or automatically  
or forcibly generate a new UMID.  
Selecting the SDI VANC line to insert the  
UMID  
You can select the VANC 1) line into which the  
generated UMID should be inserted. Make this  
selection by using setup menu item 652 UMID SD  
VANC LINE.  
Selecting the type of UMID to record  
Select whether to record a Basic UMID or an Extended  
UMID by using setup menu item 655 UMID  
RECORDING.  
See page 12-18 for more information about setup menu item  
652.  
Note  
See page 12-18 for more information about setup menu item  
655.  
UMID data in the input signal may not be readable if  
the line where UMID data is inserted into SDI input  
signals is the same as the line where this unit inserts  
VITC (setup menu item 601 (page 12-16) and setup  
menu item 602 (page 12-16)), or if that line is subject  
to blanking (setup menu item 723 (page 12-24)). In  
cases like these, change the setup menu settings.  
Selecting whether to inherit or generate  
the UMID  
When recording a UMID, you can select whether to  
inherit (copy) the UMID contained in input signals, or  
generate a new UMID. Make this selection by using  
setup menu item 656 MATERIAL NO.  
To avoid the above situation, the following settings are  
recommended.  
• For setup menu item 652, chose a line that is different  
from the lines chosen for setup menu items 601 and  
602.  
See page 12-19 for more information about setup menu item  
656.  
• Do not use setup menu item 723 (page 12-24) to  
blank the line chosen for setup menu item 652.  
Selecting the Instance Number generation  
method when inheriting UMIDs  
If you choose to inherit the UMID contained in input  
signals, almost all of the information in the UMID is  
copied without change, but the Instance Number  
changes to a value which indicates that “this UMID is  
a copy”. The new value can be generated from a 16-bit  
pseudo-random number with the addition of the  
number of copies (1 byte), or it can be generated from  
a 24-bit pseudo-random number. Select the method  
used to generate the Instance Number by using setup  
menu item 654 UMID GENERATE METHOD.  
To set Stored Ownership  
If you wish to set Stored Ownership (data in the  
Source Pack which indicates “who”) when generating  
a UMID, call up item 029 STORED OWNERSHIP in  
the setup menu and proceed as follows.  
See Section 12-2 “Setup Menu Operations” (page 12-2) for  
more information about basic setup menu operations.  
1 Set setup menu item 029 to “on” and press the F5  
See page 12-18 for more information about setup menu item  
654.  
(SET) button.  
The Stored Ownership setting screen appears. (The  
following figure shows the monitor screen.)  
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................  
1)VANC: Vertical ancillary (data)  
8-2  
Chapter 8 UMID Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITEM-029  
Time zone settings  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
The UMID uses the UTC (Coordinated Universal  
Time) time standard. Setting this unit’s built-in  
calendar clock to the local time, and then setting a time  
zone to indicate the difference from global UTC  
standard time allows correct UMIDs to be generated.  
To set the time zone, display the HOME page of the  
function menu and proceed as follows.  
COUNTRY  
ORGANIZATION  
*USER  
- XXXX  
- YYYY  
- ABCD  
2 Press the F3 (PREV) and F4 (NEXT) buttons to  
select the item you want to set (COUNTRY,  
ORGANIZATION, or USER).  
See Section 11-1-2 “Using the Function Menu” (page 11-2)  
for more information about function menu operations.  
1 With the ENTRY button in the editing control  
The selected item (example: USER) is shown in  
F2.  
section held down, press the F5 (MENU) button.  
The error logger screen appears.  
SET 029:USER  
- ABCD  
PREV  
UP  
ITEM  
USER  
F2  
NEXT  
F4  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F3  
Refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1 for more  
information about the error logger.  
3 Press the F2 (USER) button.  
2 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
4 The content of the setting is a character string (in  
this example “ABCD”). Select any character to  
change in the string by pressing the F3 (PREV)  
and F4 (NEXT) buttons.  
The OFFSET TO UTC item appears.  
ERR OFFSET TO UTC  
+09:00  
–
LOG PREV  
NEXT  
+
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
The selected character flashes.  
ERROR LOGGER  
(014/023)  
014 REFERENCE MISSING  
015 AUDIO PB CONDITION  
016 VIDEO PB CONDITION  
5 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to display the  
desired character in the position of the flashing  
character.  
TAPE ERROR  
WARNING  
CONDITION  
ON  
ON  
ON  
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all of the characters that  
you want to change.  
*OFFSET TO UTC  
Push SET button  
2001 12 24 23:59:59  
+09:00  
7 • If you do not want to change the other items  
(COUNTRY and ORGANIZATION), proceed to  
step 8.  
3 Press the F1 (PREV) and F2 (NEXT) button to  
select the OFFSET TO UTC item, and use the  
MULTI CONTROL knob or the F3 (–) and F4 (+)  
buttons to set the offset to UTC time.  
• If you want to change the other items, press the  
F1 (ITEM) button and proceed as in steps 2 to 6.  
For example, if the local time is 9 hours in advance  
of UTC, set to “+9:00”.  
8 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
The changed settings are confirmed.  
4 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
To cancel changes and exit the setup menu  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
This makes the setting effective.  
Chapter 8 UMID Functions  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1 Overview of UMID Functions  
8-3 UMID Output and Display  
This section explains how to output and display  
UMIDs.  
UMID display on the video monitor  
The video monitor connected to the COMPOSITE  
VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector or the SDI  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector on the connector  
panel displays all UMID items at once. The display of  
each line is explained below.  
8-3-1 UMID Output Settings  
You can choose to output UMIDs or not, and select  
either Basic UMID or Extended UMID when you  
choose to output UMIDs. Make these settings using  
setup menu item 651 UMID OUTPUT.  
UMID INFORMATION  
1
2
INSTANCE 24PRS XX-XX-XX  
MATERIAL IEEE 1394 ZONE  
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX  
XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX  
DATE/TIME 20XX/XX/XX  
XX:XX:XX:XX +XX:XX  
See page 12-18 for more information about setup menu item  
651.  
3
4
8-3-2 UMID Display  
5
6
7
8
9
ALTITUDE XXXXXXXXm  
LONGITUDE EXXX XX'XX.XX  
LATITUDE SXXX XX'XX.XX  
ORGANIZATION XXXX  
During recording and playback, UMID data appears in  
the menu display section of the control panel and on  
the video monitor.  
USER XXXX COUNTRY XXXX  
1 Instance Number generation method and  
Instance Number  
To display the UMID  
The generation method is displayed as follows.  
CP+16: “16-bit PRS (pseudo-random sequence)  
+Copy No.” method  
24PRS: 24-bit PRS method  
others: Other than the above  
In function menu page 5, press the F2 (UMID) button.  
See Section 11-1-2 “Using the Function Menu” (page 11-2)  
for more information about function menu operations.  
The UMID appears in the menu display section of the  
control panel and on the video monitor.  
2 Material Number generation method  
SMPTE: SMPTE method  
IEEE 1394 ZONE: IEEE 1394 ZONE method  
IEEE 1394 RND: IEEE 1394 RND method  
others: Other than the above  
First item in UMID displayed in menu display section  
INSTANCE 24PRS XX-XX-XX  
UMI  
D
EXIT  
F6  
3 Material Number  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
The material number is displayed in hexadecimal  
across two lines.  
See the next section “UMID display on the video monitor”  
for examples of the UMID displayed on the video monitor.  
The following items, 4 through 9, are contained in  
the Source Pack.  
To switch the displayed UMID item in the  
menu display section  
Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob.  
4 Date/Time  
Date/Time data is displayed across two lines.  
The upper line shows the MJD (Modified Julian Date)  
contained in the Source Pack, converted to UTC.  
The lower line shows the data in unit count format  
(hours : minutes : seconds : frame) converted to UTC.  
To exit from UMID display  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
8-4  
Chapter 8 UMID Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
The function for converting unit count to UTC works  
only when the unit rate is 2 (24 frames), 3 (24/1.001  
frames), 4 (25 frames), 6 (30 frames), or 7 (30/1.001  
frames). For other unit rates, the unit rate number and  
unit rate are displayed in hexadecimal.  
5 Altitude  
XXXXXXXXm: Altitude data indicating the distance  
from the center of the earth is displayed in this  
format.  
S+XXXXXXXm Y+D: Altitude data indicating the  
distance from sea level is displayed in this format.  
The meaning of the characters and strings shown  
is as follows.  
• “S” (1st character): Indicates data from a Sensor.  
“R” is shown for position data from the  
recording device (Recorder), and “T” is shown  
for Target position data.  
• “+” (2nd character): Indicates higher than sea  
level. “–” indicates lower than sea level.  
• “XXXXXXXm” : Altitude data (unit meters).  
• “Y”: The number of satellites used to calculate  
position data (hexadecimal).  
• “D”: DOP (dilution of precision) value.  
• “+” (between Y and D): Displayed when a  
supportive apparatus was used. A space (blank)  
is displayed when no supportive apparatus was  
used.  
6 Longitude  
Following “W” to indicate west longitude or “E” to  
indicate east longitude, the longitude is displayed in  
degrees, minutes, and seconds (seconds are shown up  
to 2 decimal places).  
Example: “E134 59’23.00” for “East longitude 134  
degrees 59 minutes 23.00 seconds”  
7 Latitude  
Following “N” to indicate north latitude or “S” to  
indicate south latitude, the latitude is displayed in  
degrees, minutes, and seconds (seconds are shown up  
to 2 decimal places).  
Example: “N34 59’23.32” for”North latitude 34  
degrees 59 minutes 23.32 seconds”  
Chapter 8 UMID Functions  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1 Overview of Essence Mark Functions  
An essence mark uses a term value dictionary item as  
defined in the SMPTE RP210A Metadata Dictionary  
to express and transfer points such as recording start  
points and edit point candidates in up to 32 bytes of  
data.  
The basic format of the SMPTE RP210A Metadata  
Dictionary is defined in SMPTE 336M Data Encoding  
Protocol using Key-Length-Value (KLV coding  
specifications).  
Chapter 9 Essence Marks  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1 Übersicht über die Essenzmarken-Funktionen  
9-2 Essence Mark Recording and Output  
Selecting whether to record generated  
essence marks  
9-2-1 Essence Mark Recording  
Essence marks contained in SDI input signals and  
essence marks generated by this unit can be recorded  
to tape together with video signals.  
All essence mark data generated by this unit is 7-bit  
ASCII codes. The generation period is 1 frame.  
You can select whether or not to record generated  
essence mark data when you record video signals with  
this unit. Make this selection using setup menu item  
662 ESSENCE MARK SELF RECORD.  
See page 12-20 for more information about setup menu item  
662.  
Selecting the SDI VANC line into which to  
insert essence marks  
9-2-2 Essence Mark Output  
You can select the SDI signal VANC line into which  
essence marks should be inserted. Make this selection  
using setup menu item 660 ESSENCE MARK SD  
VANC LINE.  
Essence marks can be output to SDI signals when  
playing back a tape. Information such as shot marks  
recorded on the tape can also be converted into essence  
marks and output.  
See page 12-19 for more information about setup menu item  
660.  
Note  
Selecting whether to output essence  
marks  
Essence mark data in the input signal may not be  
readable if the line where Essence mark data is  
inserted into SDI input signals is the same as the line  
where this unit inserts VITC (setup menu item 601  
(page 12-16) and setup menu item 602 (page 12-16)),  
or if that line is subject to blanking (setup menu item  
723 (page 12-24)). In cases like these, change the  
setup menu settings.  
You can select whether or not to output essence marks  
when you play back a tape. Make this selection using  
setup menu item 657 ESSENCE MARK TAPE  
OUTPUT.  
See page 12-19 for more information about setup menu item  
657.  
To avoid the above situation, the following settings are  
recommended.  
• For setup menu item 660, chose a line that is different  
from the lines chosen for setup menu items 601 and  
602.  
Outputting shot marks converted into  
essence marks  
You can select whether or not to convert shot marks  
recorded on a tape into essence marks for output when  
you play back the tape. Make this selection using setup  
menu item 658 SHOT MARK ESSENCE MARK  
CONVERT.  
• Do not use setup menu item 723 (page 12-24) to  
blank the line chosen for setup menu item 652.  
Selecting whether to record essence  
marks contained in input video signals  
See page 12-19 for more information about setup menu item  
658.  
You can select whether or not to record essence mark  
data contained in input video signals. Make this  
selection using setup menu item 661 ESSENCE  
MARK INPUT RECORD.  
See page 12-20 for more information about setup menu item  
661.  
9-2  
Chapter 9 Essence Marks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1 Overview of Auto Event Detector Functions  
See Chapter 9 for more information about essence marks,  
and see Chapter 7 for more information about the Tele-File  
functions.  
The Auto Event Detector (AED) detects locations  
where video signals show large changes (cuts), and  
locations where the video suddenly becomes brighter  
for a short period (flash).  
Detected events can be converted into essence marks  
and output. The time code of detected events can be  
recorded in a Tele-File label.  
The Auto Event Detector function works for all tapes  
that can be played back by this unit.  
Note  
Events are output about 3 frames after the actual  
locations of the events.  
10-2 Event Output and Recording  
To write the time code of cut events to a Tele-  
File label  
Outputtting events converted into essence  
marks  
With the ENTRY button in the editing control section  
held down, press the VAR button in the search control  
section. The tape starts to run in the forward direction  
at a high speed where noiseless playback is possible,  
and events detected by the AED are written to a Tele-  
File label as cue data.  
To stop the writing to the Tele-File label, press the  
STOP button or do something else to change the play  
mode.  
You can select whether or not to convert into essence  
marks and output events detected by the AED during  
playback (normal playback, variable speed playback,  
and jog playback). Make this selection using setup  
menu item 659 AED ESSENCE MARK CONVERT.  
See page 12-19 for more information about setup menu item  
659.  
Notes  
• Writing stops automatically if the Tele-File memory  
becomes full.  
Recording event marks in a Tele-File label  
• Make sure that the Tele-File label is writable, for  
example by removing write protection if it is applied.  
The time code of cut events detected by the AED can  
be written to a Tele-File label.  
Chapter 10 Auto Event Detector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1  
11-1 Overview of the Function Menu  
The function menu allows you to make frequently  
made settings, such as selection of input video signals  
and time code settings.  
HOME2 page (user-defined function keys)  
Up to six function keys can be defined (i.e. six  
functions can be assigned to the F1 to F6 buttons in the  
HOME2 page).  
You can select and define the following function keys:  
• Functions selected from the function menu items in  
the HOME page and menu pages 1 to 4  
• Function key to display the setting for setup menu  
item 211 (REMOTE1 PORT) and to carry out the  
operation when the menu item setting is “panel”.  
11-1-1 Function Menu  
Configuration  
The function menu consists of six pages by factory  
default: the HOME page and five pages numbered 1 to  
5. You can also display the HOME2 page by setting  
user-defined function keys. The following icons appear  
at the left edge of the menu display section to denote  
the current page.  
Note  
By factory default, no function keys are defined in the  
HOME2 page.  
It is not possible to display the HOME2 page unless  
you have defined at least one function key in that page.  
: HOME page  
: Page 1  
: Page 2  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
: Page 3  
For details on defining user-defined function keys in the  
HOME2 page, refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
: Page 4  
: Page 5  
: Page 6  
Page 6  
: HOME 2 page  
You can define up to six setup menu items (assign six  
setup menu items to the F1 to F6 buttons) and register  
them on page 6.  
Each page has a menu display section made up of an  
upper and lower part. The upper part displays the  
menu items (functions) in the page, and the lower part  
displays the menu item settings. The figure below  
shows the menu display section in the HOME page.  
Note  
There is nothing defined on page 6 when the unit is  
shipped from the factory.  
For more information about defining setup menu items for  
page 6, refer to the Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
Menu items (functions)  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
PB  
Y-R,B  
OFF  
TC  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Settings (values)  
In the figure above, Y-R,B (analog component signals)  
is selected as the setting for VID.IN, the menu item for  
button F1. This manual refers to this as “F1 (VID.IN)  
in function menu HOME page is set to Y-R,B.”  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1  
11-1 Overview of the Function Menu  
11-1-2 Using the Function Menu  
To change a menu item setting  
To change a menu item setting, press the  
corresponding function button (F1 to F6) to display the  
desired setting in the lower part of the menu display.  
Each press of the button displays the next setting.  
When a menu item setting flashes  
Menu item settings flash to inform you that you can  
change the setting value by rotating the MULTI  
CONTROL knob.  
To change the function menu page  
Press either of the page buttons (V, v).  
• The V button selects the next page in the order  
HOME t 1 t 2 t 3 t 4 t 5 t 6 t HOME...  
• The v button selects the next page in the order  
HOME t 6 t 5 t 4 t 3 t 2 t 1 t HOME...  
With one of menu pages 1 to 6 displayed, pressing the  
HOME button changes the page to the HOME page.  
Pressing the HOME button when the HOME or  
HOME2 page is displayed changes the page to  
HOME2 or HOME, respectively.  
Settings which do not appear in the menu  
display section  
In the HOME page (see the figure in Section 11-1-1  
“Function Menu Configuration”), the settings for F5  
(MENU) and F6 (TCGSET) do not appear in the menu  
display. When you press the F5 or F6 button, the  
whole menu page changes to allow you to set these  
items.  
11-2  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2 Function Menu Item List  
The function menu has the following items.  
HOME page  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (VID.IN)  
Selects the input video signal.  
COMPST: Analog composite signal  
Y-R,B: Analog component signal  
SDI: SDI signal  
SG (normally not displayed): Test signal from the internal test signal generator (For details, see setup  
menu item 710 on page 12-22.)  
F2 (PB/EE)  
F3 (CONFI)  
F4 (CTL/TC)  
Selects the video and audio signals output during fast forward, rewind, stop, and standby.  
PB: Playback signals  
EE: E-E mode signals  
Selects whether or not to use the CONFI playback function when recording.  
ENABLE: Use the CONFI playback function. (The CONFI indicator lights in the time data display.)  
DISABL: Do not use the CONFI playback function.  
Selects the time data to display in time data display area 1 (see page 2-7).  
TC: Playback time code read by the internal time code reader, or recording time code. The LTC or VITC  
time data type indicator (see page 2-7) lights.a)  
UB: User bits data of playback time code or recording time code. The LUB or VIUB time data type  
indicator lights, depending on whether the time code is LTC or VITC.a)  
CTL: The running time of the tape being played back or recorded, as calculated from a count of CTL  
signals recorded on the tape. The time is displayed in Hours: Minutes: Seconds: Frames format.  
F5 (MENU)  
Puts the system into setup menu mode (see Chapter 12).  
When the current setup menu settings are the same as the contents of any of menu banks 1 to 4, or the  
factory defaults, the corresponding indication (1), (2), (3), or (dflt) appears.  
(1): Same as menu bank 1.  
(2): Same as menu bank 2.  
(3): Same as menu bank 3.  
(4): Same as menu bank 4.  
(dflt): Same as factory defaults.  
F6 (TCGSET)  
• When F4 (CTL/TC) is set to TC, a screen appears that allows you to set the initial value of the time code  
generated by the internal time code generator (see page 4-3).  
• When F4 (CTL/TC) is set to UB, a screen appears that allows you to set the time code user bits (see  
page 4-3).  
a) The selection of LTC or VITC depends on the setting of  
F6 (TCR) in function menu page 1.  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-3  
11-2 Function Menu Item List  
Page 1  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (TCG)  
Selects the time code to use.  
INT: Time code generated by the internal time code generator  
EXT: One of the following time codes  
• When F6 (TCR) is set to LTC or AUTO, the external time code input from the TIME CODE IN connector  
• When F6 (TCR) is set to VITC, the VITC time code of the input video signal  
RP188: Synchronize the internal time code generator with the SMPTE RP188 time code contained in the  
SDI input signal.  
Note  
If you set this menu item to RP188 when F1 (VID.IN) in the HOME page is not set to SDI or when no SDI  
input is present, the menu setting display “RP188” flashes as a warning. Nevertheless, the unit operates in  
compliance with the setting of this menu item.  
F2 (TCG)  
F3 (RUN)  
F4 (DF)  
For the internal time code generator, selects one of the following.  
PRESET: Preset the initial value of time code generated by the internal time code generator by a control  
panel operation, or by remote control from the device connected to the REMOTE1-IN(9P) connector.  
REGEN: Synchronize the internal time code generator with the playback time code read by the internal  
time code reader.  
Selects one of the following running modes for the internal time code generator.  
FREE: The time code continues to increase as long as the unit is powered on, regardless of the unit’s  
operating mode.  
REC: Time code increases during recording only. If you select this mode, you should also set F1 (TCG) to  
INT, and set F2 (TCG) to PRESET.  
In 525-line mode, selects either drop-frame mode or non-drop frame mode for the time code generator and  
the CTL counter.  
DF: Drop-frame mode  
NDF: Non-drop frame mode  
F5 (VITC)  
F6 (TCR)  
Specifies whether or not to record the VITC generated by the internal time code generator.  
ON: Record internally generated VITC.  
OFF: Do not record internally generated VITC.  
Selects the type of time code to display in the time data display.  
LTC: Display LTC.  
AUTO: Display VITC when tape speed is 1/2 or less of normal speed, and LTC otherwise.  
VITC: Display VITC.  
11-4  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 2  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (V.PROC)  
Selects the control method for the internal digital video processor.  
LOCAL: Change the settings of the internal digital video processor by using this function menu.  
REMOTE: Use the optional BVR-50/50P Remote Control Unit to control the internal digital video  
processor.  
MENU: Change the settings of the internal digital video processor by using the MENU of the HOME page.  
Sets the video signal output level (–∞ to +3 dB).  
F2 (VIDEO)  
PRESET: Regardless of manually values, the video signal is set to the standard level.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the value for the video signal output level.  
F3 (CHROMA)  
Sets the chroma signal output level (–∞ to +3 dB).  
PRESET: Regardless of manually set values, the chroma signal is set to the standard level.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the value for the chroma signal output level.  
F4 (HUE) (525-  
line mode)/  
(C PHAS) (625-  
line mode)  
Sets the color phase (phase relative to burst)  
PRESET: Regardless of manually set values, the color phase is set to the standard value.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the value across the range 30°.  
F5 (SETUP)  
(525-line mode)/  
(BLACK) (625-  
line mode)  
Sets the setup level (525/60 mode) or black level (625/50 mode)  
PRESET: Regardless of manually set values, the level is set to the standard value.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the setup level across the range 30 IRE (525/60 mode) or to adjust the black level across the range  
210 mV (625/50 mode).  
F6 (YC DLY)  
(DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
Sets amount of Y/C delay.  
PRESET: Regardless of manually set values, the Y/C delay is to the standard value.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the Y/C delay across the range 100 ns.  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-5  
11-2 Function Menu Item List  
Page 3  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (SYNC)  
Sets the output signal sync phase.  
Setting method  
With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust the output signal  
sync phase across the range 15 µs relative to this unit’s input reference signal.  
Adjust this item when you want to adjust the output signal sync phase precisely to match a reference  
signal, or when connecting this unit and other VTRs to a device such as a switcher to perform operations  
such as special effects editing.  
F2 (SC)  
Sets the output signal subcarrier phase.  
Setting method  
With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust the output signal  
subcarrier phase across the range 200 ns relative to this unit’s input reference signal.  
Adjust this item when you are using composite signals in editing and want to adjust the output signal  
subcarrier phase precisely to match a reference signal. Even when this value is adjusted, the output SCH  
(subcarrier to sync) phase is maintained.  
F3 (VIN LV)  
F4 (EMPHSS)  
F5 (T INFO)  
Sets the level of composite video signals input to the COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors.  
AGC: Adjusts the level automatically.  
Manual setting: With the displayed setting flashing, you can rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to adjust  
the level of composite video signals input to the COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors.  
Specifies whether to add audio emphasis to analog audio input signals and Betacam/Betacam SP format  
playback audio signals.  
ON: Add audio emphasis.  
OFF: Do not add audio emphasis.  
Selects the type of time data to display in time data display area 2.  
TOTAL: Display total time.  
REMAIN: Display remaining time.  
11-6  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 4  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (CAPSTN)  
Selects the number of fields for capstan lock in playback and editing.  
For DVW-M2000/2000  
2F: The capstan servo locks in units of 2 fields.  
• For tape output, color framing may not match the reference signal selected with the F2 (OUTREF).  
• In assemble editing, color framing may be non-continuous at edit points.  
When playing back a tape that was recorded with composite source signals, a vertical shift in the video  
(H shift) occurs. (When setup menu item 712 is set to ON.)  
4F: The capstan servo locks in units of 4 fields.  
• For tape output, color framing matches the reference signal selected with the F2 (OUTREF).  
• In assemble editing, color framing is continuous at edit points.  
Even when playing back a tape that was recorded with composite source signals, no vertical shift in  
the video (H shift) occurs. You should set this menu item to this setting when you are editing  
composite signals, when continuity in video phase across edit points is required, and when you  
perform A/B-roll editing.  
For DVW-M2000P/2000P  
2F: The capstan servo locks in units of 2 fields.  
• For tape output, color framing may not match the reference signal selected with the F2 (OUTREF).  
• In assemble editing, color framing may be non-continuous at edit points.  
When playing back a tape that was recorded with composite source signals, a vertical shift in the video  
(H shift) occurs. (When setup menu item 712 is set to ON.)  
4F: The capstan servo locks in units of 4 fields.  
• For tape output, color framing may not match the reference signal selected with the F2 (OUTREF).  
• In assemble editing, color framing may be non-continuous at edit points.  
When playing back a tape that was recorded with composite source signals, a vertical shift in the video  
(H shift) occurs. (When setup menu item 712 is set to ON.)  
8F: The capstan servo locks in units of 8 fields.  
• For tape output, color framing matches the reference signal selected with the F2 (OUTREF).  
• In assemble editing, color framing is continuous at edit points.  
Even when playing back a tape that was recorded with composite source signals, no vertical shift in  
the video (H shift) occurs. You should set this menu item to this setting when you are editing  
composite signals, when continuity in video phase across edit points is required, and when you  
perform A/B-roll editing.  
F2 (OUTREF)  
Selects the reference signal of this unit, according to the setting of setup menu item 309 and this unit’s  
operating state.  
REF: Use the signal input to the REF.VIDEO INPUT connector as the reference signal. During recording,  
input digital audio signals and video signals must be synchronized with this signal.  
INPUT: Use the input video signal selected in the F1 (VID.IN) of the HOME page as the reference signal.  
F3 (DOLBY)  
(DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
When using oxide tapes, specifies whether or not to use the Dolby type C low-frequency noise reduction  
(NR) system.  
NR ON: Use the Dolby NR system when playing back analog Betacam oxide tapes.  
NR OFF: Do not use the Dolby NR system when playing back analog Betacam oxide tapes.  
Specifies whether or not to superimpose time code, menu settings, error messages, and so on over the  
video signals output to the 3 (SUPER) connector in the SDI OUTPUT connectors, and the 3 (SUPER)  
connector in the COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT connectors.  
F4 (CHARA)  
ON: Superimpose.  
OFF: Do not superimpose.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-7  
11-2 Function Menu Item List  
Item  
Setting  
F5 (RECINH)  
Specifies whether or not to inhibit recording to tape.  
ON: Inhibit recording to tape depending on the setting of setup menu item 310.  
OFF: Do not inhibit recording to tape.  
F6 (PREREAD)  
Specifies whether or not to preread (read before write) in insert editing.  
ON: Preread depending on the setting of setup menu item 319.  
OFF: Do not preread.  
Page 5  
Item  
Setting  
F1 (TELE-F)  
Displays the Tele-File menu.  
For details of the Tele-File menu, see Section 7-3 “Tele-File Menu” (page 7-3).  
Displays UMID information during recording/playback.  
F2 (UMID)  
For details of UMID, see Chapter 8.  
Displays the setup utility menu.  
F5 (SUPUTL)  
For details of the setup utility menu, see Chapter 13.  
11-8  
Chapter 11 Function Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-1 Setup Menu Configuration  
Configuration of the extended setup menu  
The extended setup menu comprises the following  
This unit has the following setup menus.  
• Basic setup menu  
groups of items.  
• Extended setup menu  
To access the extended setup menu, a setting on the  
internal SS-89 board is required.  
Item group Function  
Refer to  
Items  
Settings relating to control  
panels  
Page 12-8  
100 to 199  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.  
Items  
200 to 299  
Settings relating to the remote Page 12-11  
control interface  
Items  
300 to 399  
Settings relating to editing  
operations  
Page 12-12  
Page 12-15  
Page 12-15  
Page 12-16  
Page 12-21  
Page 12-26  
Page 12-30  
In this manual, both the basic setup menu items and  
extended setup menu items are also referred to simply  
as setup menu items or menu items.  
Items  
400 to 499  
Settings relating to preroll  
Items  
500 to 599  
Settings relating to tape  
protection  
Configuration of the basic setup menu  
The basic setup menu comprises the following groups  
of items.  
Items  
600 to 699  
Settings relating to the time  
code generator  
Item group Function  
Refer to  
Items  
700 to 799  
Settings relating to video  
control  
Items  
Display of the total number of  
Page 14-5  
H01 to H14 hours the unit has been  
powered on, and other  
information collected by the  
digital hours meter  
Items  
800 to 899  
Settings relating to audio  
control  
Items  
900 to 999  
Settings relating to digital  
processing  
Items  
001 to 099  
Settings relating to the preroll  
time, superimposed text  
information, switching between  
525-line (NTSC) and 625-line  
(PAL) operation modes, etc.  
Page 12-5  
Page 12-7  
Items  
Settings relating to the menu  
B01 to B20 banks for saving menu settings  
For the menu items added when the BKMW-104 HD Up-  
Converter Board is installed, refer to the Operation Manual  
or Installation Manual for the BKMW-104.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
12-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2 Setup Menu Operations  
12-2 Setup Menu Operations  
To display menus on the monitor  
To display setup menus  
Setting CHARA to ON in function menu page 4 allows  
you to display setup menus on the monitor connected  
to the COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)  
connector or SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector of  
this unit. When a setup menu appears on the monitor, a  
cursor indicates the currently selected menu item.  
MULTI  
ASSEMBLE  
RECORDER  
CONTROL  
VIDEO  
TC  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CUE  
PUSH/  
SHIFT  
PLAYER  
ALARM  
KEY INHI  
CHANNEL  
CONDITION  
VID. IN PB/EE CONFI CTL/TCMENU TCGSET  
Y-R,B  
PB  
OFF  
TC  
RESET  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
HOME  
Group name for the  
currently selected item  
HOME button  
Function menu HOME page  
F5 (MENU) button  
Cursor indicating  
the currently  
selected item  
With the function menu HOME page showing in the  
menu display, press the F5 (MENU) button.  
The currently selected setup menu item is displayed in  
the menu display, with the menu item number flashing.  
For basic operations in the menu display, see page 2-7.  
Customizing the setup menu  
You can customize the setup menu so that items which  
you do not use are not displayed.  
“[C]” appears in the upper right of the monitor when  
the menu is customized (when there are items which  
are not displayed). However, there is no indication in  
the menu display section that the menu has been  
customized.  
SET  
UP  
H01 : OPE HOURS  
SELECT  
O
SET  
EXIT  
Setup menu item H01 displayed  
For details about how to customize the setup menu, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
Displaying a desired menu item  
MULTI  
CONTROL  
ASSEMBLE  
RECORDER  
VIDEO  
TC  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CUE  
PUSH/  
SHIFT  
PLAYER  
ALARM  
KEY INHI  
CHANNEL  
CONDITION  
TIME  
–
SET 001:P–ROLL  
5S  
UP  
SELECT  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
RESET  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
HOME  
v and V buttons  
MULTI  
CONTROL knob  
When the menu item number displayed in the menu  
display is flashing, you can change the menu item by  
turning the MULTI CONTROL knob.  
To skip from one item group to the next, press the v  
button or V button.  
12-2  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To display a desired sub-item  
For a menu item having sub-items, you can select a  
desired sub-item as follows.  
To change the settings of menu items with  
sub-items  
When a selected menu item has sub-items, select a  
desired sub-item using the procedure described in the  
section “To display a desired sub-item” on this page  
making the sub-item name flash, then proceed as  
follows.  
1 With a desired menu item selected, press the F2  
(SELECT) button.  
The currently selected sub-item name flashes.  
1 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
2 Turn the MULTI CONTROL knob to select a  
The current setting of the sub-item flashes.  
desired sub-item.  
2 Press the F3 (–) button or F4 (+) button, or turn the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to select a desired  
setting value.  
Changing menu item setting values  
The procedures for changing menu item setting values  
or sub-item setting values are described below.  
To select another sub-item and change its  
setting value  
Press the F1 (RETURN) button making the current  
sub-item name flash, then perform the procedures  
for selecting a desired sub-item and changing its  
setting value.  
To change the settings of menu items without  
sub-items  
After selecting a desired menu item using the  
procedure described in the section “Displaying a  
desired menu item” on page 12-2 and with the menu  
item number flashing, proceed as follows.  
To select another menu item and change its  
setting value  
Press the F1 (RETURN) button twice in succession  
making the current menu item number flash, then  
perform the procedures for selecting a desired  
menu item and changing its setting value.  
1 Press the F2 (SELECT) button.  
The current setting of the menu item flashes.  
2 Press the F3 (–) button or F4 (+) button, or turn the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to select a desired  
setting value.  
3 When all required changes have been made, press  
the F5 (SET) button.  
This makes the new settings effective.  
To select another menu item and change its  
setting value  
Press the F1 (RETURN) button making the current  
menu item number flash, then perform the  
procedures for selecting a desired menu item and  
changing its setting value.  
To abandon making changes and exit from the  
setup menu display  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
3 When all required changes have been made, press  
the F5 (SET) button.  
This makes the new settings effective.  
To abandon making changes and exit from the  
setup menu display  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2 Setup Menu Operations  
Resetting the menu settings to their  
factory default values (menu item B20)  
Recall (B01)  
Save (B11)  
Save  
Current active  
menu settings  
Menu bank 1  
Menu bank 2  
To reset the current active menu settings to their  
factory default values, proceed as follows.  
a)  
Recall (B02)  
1 Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure described in  
the section “To change the settings of menu items  
without sub-items” on page 12-3 to set menu item  
B20 RESET SETUP to ON.  
Save (B12)  
a)  
Recall (B03)  
Save (B13)  
Menu bank 3  
Menu bank 4  
The current active menu settings are reset to their  
factory default settings.  
a)  
Recall (B20)  
Save  
2 Press the F5 (SET) button again.  
a)  
This saves the menu settings.  
a) Use maintenance menu item 122.  
Menu bank operations (menu items B01 to  
B13)  
This unit allows menu settings to be saved in what are  
termed “menu banks”. Saved sets of menu settings can  
be recalled for use as required.  
To save the current active menu settings  
Set one of menu items B11 SAVE BANK 1 to B13  
SAVE BANK 3 to ON, depending on which of the  
menu banks you wish to save in, then press the F5  
(SET) button.  
To recall settings from a menu bank  
When recalling the settings saved in one of menu  
banks 1 to 3, set the corresponding one of menu items  
B01 RECALL BANK 1 to B03 RECALL BANK 3 to  
ON, then press the F5(SET) button.  
When you wish to recall the settings saved in menu  
bank 4, select bank-4 with menu item B20 PRESET  
SETUP.  
For details about menu bank 4, refer to the Maintenance  
Manual.  
12-4  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-3 Items in the Basic Setup Menu  
The basic setup menu contains the following items.  
In the “Settings” column of the table, the factory  
default settings are indicated by an enclosing box.  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
001  
PREROLL TIME  
0S ... 5S ... 30S: Set the preroll time to between 0 and 30 seconds. A preroll time  
of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this unit for editing.  
002a)  
CHARACTER H-  
POSITION  
Adjust the horizontal screen position of the character information output from the  
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the SDI OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
00 ... 1C ... 3C (525-line mode)/00 ... 19 ... 36 (625-line mode): The  
hexadecimal value 00 is for the far left of the screen and increasing the value  
moves the position of the characters to the right.  
003a), b)  
CHARACTER V-  
POSITION  
Adjust the vertical screen position of the first line of the characters information  
output from the COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the  
SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
00 ... 5C ... 71 (525-line mode)/00 ... 70 ... 88 (625-line mode): The hexadecimal  
value 00 is for the top of the screen and increasing the value lowers the  
position of the characters.  
004  
005  
SYNCHRONIZE  
When editing using this unit as a controller and an external VTR connected to this  
unit via a 9-pin remote control cable, this item determines whether or not to  
operate the two units in phase synchronization.  
OFF: Do not operate in phase synchronization.  
ON : Operate in phase synchronization.  
DISPLAY INFORMATION Determines the kind of character information to be output from the COMPOSITE  
SELECT  
VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)  
connector when the function menu item CHARA is set to ON.  
T&STA : Time data display information and the unit’s status  
T&UB: Time data display information and the user’s bits  
T&CTL: Time data display information and CTL  
T&T: Time data display information and time code (LTC or VITC)  
TIME: Time code (LTC or VITC) only  
If there is an overlap between the setting of this item and the setting of the control  
panel, it is automatically avoided. For example, if CTL is selected on the control  
panel and this menu item setting is T&CTL, then CTL and LTC are output.  
006  
LOCAL FUNCTION  
ENABLE  
Determines which buttons on the control panel are enabled when this unit is  
controlled from external equipment.  
DIS: All buttons and switches are disabled.  
S&E&F : Only the STOP button, EJECT button, and F1 to F6 buttons are  
enabled.  
ENA: All buttons and switches except the RECORDER button and PLAYER  
button are enabled.  
MAP: Buttons and switches are enabled or disabled in accordance with the  
settings of menu item 023.  
007  
008  
TAPE TIMER DISPLAY  
Determines whether to display the CTL count in 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.  
+ –12H : 12-hour mode  
24H: 24-hour mode  
MONITORING  
SELECTION FOR VTR-  
TO-VTR EDIT  
For recorder-player editing with only one monitor connected to the recorder,  
determines whether the recorder is forced into E-E mode when the recorder’s  
PLAYER button is pressed to view the player’s playback signals on the monitor.  
MANU : Do not force the recorder into E-E mode.  
AUTO: Force the recorder into E-E mode.  
a) When setting items 002 and 003, watch the monitor  
screen, and adjust to the required state.  
b) When displaying time code values, there is a slight time  
delay. Therefore, when creating a tape for off-line  
editing, the information inserted in the upper half of the  
screen may be delayed by one frame.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-3 Items in the Basic Setup Menu  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
009a)  
CHARACTER TYPE  
Determines the type of characters such as time code output from the  
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the SDI OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
WHITE : White letters on a black background  
BLACK: Black letters on a white background  
W/OUT: White letters with black outline  
B/OUT: Black letters with white outline  
011a)  
012b)  
CHARACTER V-SIZE  
Determines the vertical size of characters such as time code output from the  
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector and the SDI OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER) connector for superimposed display on the monitor.  
×1 : Standard size  
×2: 2 times standard size  
CONDITION DISPLAY  
VIDEO MONTOR  
Specifies whether to add an indication of channel condition and tape time to  
superimposed text, when “×1” is selected in menu item 011.  
disable : Do not display.  
enable: Display.  
a) When setting items 009 and 011, watch the monitor  
screen, and adjust to the required state.  
b) The channel condition indication appears under the timer  
or status line (under the video playback level indication  
during playback of an analog tape), in the format  
“V–A–”, where the symbol following the “V” indicates  
the rotating head condition for video channels and the  
symbol following the “A” indicates the rotating head  
condition for audio channels.  
The following three symbols appear:  
“–” (good)  
“*” (fair)  
“x” (poor)  
The tape time is displayed as follows in the time data  
display area 2 of the time data/menu display section.  
BOT: Displayed when the tape has returned to the top.  
EOT: Displayed when the tape has reached the end.  
TTL: 00: 00: Displays a time representing the total  
length of the tape.  
REM: 00: 00: Displays a time representing the  
remaining length of the tape.  
“00:00” means “hours:minutes” for both TTL and REM.  
The setting of item F5 (T INFO) on page 3 of the  
function menu determines whether TTL or REM is  
displayed.  
For more information about page 3 of the function menu,  
see “Page 3” in Section 11-2 “Function Menu Item List”  
(page 11-6).  
12-6  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item number Item name  
023 LOCAL KEY MAP  
Settings  
When MAP is selected in menu item 006, the buttons that can be operated on the  
control panel of this unit when it is being controlled by remote control from  
another device can be selected from the following sub-items.  
The settings of each sub-item are as follows.  
DIS : Do not function.  
ENA: Function.  
Sub-item  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STOP  
Select whether the STOP button functions.  
Select whether the PLAY button functions.  
Select whether the REC and EDIT buttons function.  
Select whether the STANDBY button functions.  
Select whether the EJECT button functions.  
Select whether the JOG button functions.  
PLAY  
REC/EDIT  
STANDBY  
EJECT  
JOG  
SHUTTLE  
VAR  
Select whether the SHUTTLE button functions.  
Select whether the VAR button functions.  
FF/REW  
Select whether the F FWD and REW buttons function.  
Select whether the PREROLL button functions.  
10 PREROLL  
11 AUTO/PRE/REVIEW Select whether the AUTO EDIT, PREVIEW, REVIEW buttons function.  
12 F-KEY  
Select whether the F1 to F6 buttons function.  
Select whether the audio signal buttons function.  
Select whether the EDIT PRESET button functions.  
13 AUDIO/MONITOR  
14 EDIT PRESET  
15 OTHERS  
Select whether the ENTRY, IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, AUDIO OUT, TRIM+, TRIM–,  
GS-MARK, GS-LIST, DELETE, and DMC EDIT buttons function.  
029  
STORED OWNERSHIP  
Select whether or not to set the Stored Ownership UMID item.  
off : Do not set.  
on: Set.  
To set Stored Ownership, display this item in the menu display section, and press  
the F5 (SET) button to move to the Stored Ownership setting screen.  
For details, see the section “To set Stored Ownership” (page 8-2).  
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 1.  
B01  
B02  
B03  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B20  
RECALL BANK 1  
RECALL BANK 2  
RECALL BANK 3  
SAVE BANK 1  
SAVE BANK 2  
SAVE BANK 3  
RESET SETUP  
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 2.  
Set to ON to recall menu settings from menu bank 3.  
Set to ON to save current active menu settings to menu bank 1.  
Set to ON to save current active menu settings to menu bank 2.  
Set to ON to save current active menu settings to menu bank 3.  
Set this item to ON to return the current menu settings to the factory defaults.  
Set it to bank-4 to use the contents of menu bank 4 as the current menu settings.  
For details about menu bank 4, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
The extended setup menu contains the following  
items.  
In the “Settings” column of the table, the factory  
default settings are indicated by an enclosing box.  
Menu items in the range 100 to 199, relating to the control panels  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
101  
SELECTION FOR  
SEARCH DIAL ENABLE  
Select how the unit enters the search mode.  
DIAL : Turning the search dial switches to search mode at all times except during  
recording/editing.  
KEY: One of the JOG, SHUTTLE, and VAR buttons must be pressed to switch to  
search mode.  
102  
MAXIMUM SPEED  
Select the fast forward and rewind tape speed and also search mode speed  
during tape playback.  
MAX : Perform fast forward, rewind, and search mode playback at the maximum  
speeds.  
MX/24: Perform fast forward and rewind at the maximum speeds, and search  
mode playback at up to 24 times normal speed.  
×24: Perform fast forward and rewind at 24 times normal speed, and search  
mode playback at up to 24 times normal speed.  
Maximum fast forward, rewind, and search mode speeds  
• Analog cassette: 35 times (525-line mode) or 42 times (625-line mode) normal  
speed.  
• Betacam SX/MPEG IMX cassettes: 60 times normal speed (525-line mode) or  
78 times (625-line mode)  
• Digital Betacam cassette: 50 times normal speed  
103  
AUDIO SELECTED LINE Select the output signal to the MONITOR OUTPUT connectors.  
OUT (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
MANU : Output the signals selected by the audio signal selection buttons on the  
lower control panel.  
AUTO1: Output stereo, using the AFM channels (3 and 4) for playback from  
metal tape, and the LNG channels (1 and 2) for playback from oxide tape.  
AUTO2: Output the signals selected by the audio signal selection buttons on the  
lower control panel, but during variable speed playback, if AFM is selected,  
automatically switch to LNG.  
104  
105  
106  
AUDIO MUTING TIME  
Select the length of time for which audio muting occurs when the unit switches to  
playback either from stopped or from still playback in the search mode.  
OFF : Set the audio muting time to zero (i.e. no muting).  
0.1S ... 1.0S: Set the audio muting time from 0.1 second to 1.0 second, in 0.1-  
second increments.  
REFERENCE SYSTEM  
ALARM  
Select whether or not to display a warning when the video/audio reference signal  
selected by the function menu item OUTREF, is not supplied or is out of phase  
with the input video signal.  
OFF: No warning.  
ON : Flash the STOP button as a warning.  
CAPSTAN LOCK  
Select the capstan servo lock mode.  
PANEL : The capstan servo lock mode is determined by the function menu item  
CAPSTN.  
2F: The capstan servo locks every two fields regardless of the setting of the  
function menu item CAPSTN.  
4F: The capstan servo locks every four fields regardless of the setting of the  
function menu item CAPSTN.  
8F (for DVW-M2000P/2000P): The capstan servo locks every eight fields  
regardless of the setting of the function menu item CAPSTN.  
12-8  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 100 to 199, relating to the control panels (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
107  
REC INHIBIT LAMP  
FLASHING  
Select whether or not to flash the REC INHI indicator when the function menu  
item RECINH is set to OFF and the record inhibit plug on the cassette is pressed  
in.  
OFF : Do not flash the REC INHI indicator.  
ON: Flash the REC INHI indicator.  
108  
AUTO EE SELECT  
When a digital cassette is inserted and the function menu item PB/EE is set to  
EE, select the VTR modes in which input video and audio signals are  
automatically handled in E-E mode.  
When an analog cassette is inserted, regardless of the function menu setting the  
PB mode is always selected.  
S/F/R : In STOP/EJECT/F.FWD/REW modes  
STOP: In STOP/EJECT modes  
109  
FORCED EE WHEN  
TAPE UNTHREAD  
During tape threading and unthreading, and when no cassette is inserted, select  
whether the setting of the function menu item PB/EE controls the PB/EE setting  
for output signals.  
OFF: Control by the function menu item PB/EE  
ON : No control (always E-E signal)  
111  
115  
TSO PLAY  
Select whether or not to enable tape speed override mode.  
DIS : Disable tape speed override mode.  
TSO: Enable tape speed override mode.  
PHASE LOCK IN  
VARIABLE X3 (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P only)  
Select whether or not to lock the capstan phase in ×3 variable speed play mode  
when playing back a Betacam or Betacam SP cassette.  
OFF : Do not lock.  
ON: Lock.  
116  
JOG DIAL RESPONSE  
Select the tape speed characteristics for the search dial rotation rate (VTR  
commands).  
TYPE1 : Tape speed varies linearly over the range –1 to +1.  
TYPE2: Tape speed varies stepwise as shown in the figure belowa) over the  
range –3 to +3. (Characterized by a zone around –1 and +1 where the tape  
speed is independent of the search dial rotation rate)  
TYPE3: Tape speed varies linearly over the range –3 to +3, as shown in the  
figure belowb).  
TYPE4: Tape speed varies stepwise as shown in the figure belowc) over the  
range –2 to +2. (Characterized by a zone around –1 and +1 where the tape  
speed is independent of the search dial rotation rate)  
117  
CONTROL PANEL  
SELECTION  
Select the control panel function when the PANEL SELECT switch on the switch  
panel is set to REAR.  
SW : Only the control panel connected to the CONTROL PANEL connector on  
the connector panel functions.  
PARA: The control panels connected to the CONTROL PANEL connectors on  
the switch panel and connector panel both function.  
a)  
b)  
c)  
Speed  
FWD  
Speed  
FWD  
Speed  
FWD  
TYPE 4  
TYPE 2  
TYPE 3  
+3  
+3  
+2  
+1  
Rotation rate  
Rotation rate  
Rotation rate  
+1  
(reverse)  
RVS  
RVS  
RVS  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
-1  
-3  
-1  
-2  
(forward)  
-3  
RVS  
RVS  
RVS  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 100 to 199, relating to the control panels (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
118  
KEY INHIBIT SWITCH  
EFFECTIVE AREA  
Select which switches and buttons can be operated when the KEY INHIBIT  
switch on the switch panel is set to ON. The following sub-items control different  
sets of switches and buttons independently.  
Sub-item  
1
REMOTE  
SELECT  
Select whether the REMOTE 1(9P) and 2(50P) buttons in the upper control panel  
are enabled.  
DIS : Disabled  
ENA: Enabled  
2
AUDIO/F-KEY  
Select whether the audio signal selection buttons and F1 to F6 buttons in the  
lower control panel are enabled.  
DIS : Disabled  
ENA: Enabled  
audio: Disable audio input signal selection, audio mixing settings, and monitor  
signal selection.  
f-key: Disable function keys (including HOME).  
in/mx: Disable audio input signal selection, audio mixing settings.  
3
MODE CONTROL Select which switch and button operations can be carried out from the lower  
control panel of this unit or an external control panel connected to this unit.  
DIS : All switches and buttons other than the audio signal selection buttons and  
F1 to F6 buttons are disabled.  
EDIT: All switches and buttons for editing operations other than the audio signal  
selection buttons and F1 to F6 buttons are disabled.  
ENA: All switches and buttons other than the audio signal selection buttons and  
F1 to F6 buttons are enabled.  
119  
VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable speed  
IN KEY PANEL CONTROL mode from the control panel of this unit.  
OFF : For MPEG IMX and analog tapes, from –1 to +3 times normal speed; for  
Digital Betacam tapes, from –1 to +3 times normal speed; for Betacam SX  
tapes, –1 to +2 times normal speed.  
ON: For MPEG IMX, Betacam SX, Digital Betacam tapes, and analog tapes, from  
0 to 1 times normal speed.  
120  
121  
CTL LOCK IN VAR/SHTL Select whether the tape transport should be phase-locked to the CTL signal  
during playback in variable speed or shuttle mode.  
OFF : Not phase-locked.  
ON: Phase-locked at the following speeds: –1, –0.5, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 times  
normal.  
DT MODE  
Select field or frame mode for variable speed playback.  
FIELD : Always field playback  
FRAME: Frame playback in the noiseless playback speed range; otherwise field  
playback.  
Frame playback provides higher-density still pictures than field playback.  
Note  
For analog Betacam playback, field playback is always used. For digital Betacam  
playback, the frame playback is valid only in the forward direction.  
125  
130  
AUTO REWIND  
Select whether to rewind the tape automatically when recording or playback  
reaches the end of a tape.  
DIS: Do not rewind the tape automatically.  
ENA : Rewind the tape automatically.  
TIMER DISPLAY  
DIMMER CONTROL  
Set the brightness of the time data/menu display panel.  
0 to 7 : Set in this range. 0 is the brightest, and 7 the dimmest.  
12-10  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 100 to 199, relating to the control panels (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
133  
TELE-FILE CONTROL  
MODE  
Selects the device used for data modification operations in the Tele-File menu.  
CONTROL PANEL : Operate with the control panel of this unit.  
REMOTE: Operate with remote devices connected to connectors such as  
REMOTE1, REMOTE2, and RS-232C.  
134  
TELE-FILE MENU AUTO Selects whether to open the Tele-File menu automatically when a cassette with a  
POPUP  
Tele-File label is loaded. However, this is valid only when the function menu is  
HOME, HOME2, or page 1 to 5.  
OFF : Do not open the Tele-File menu automatically.  
ON: Open the Tele-File menu automatically.  
135  
136  
TELE-FILE THREAD  
COUNTER CLEAR MODE NOT CLEAR : Do not clear the thread counter.  
Selects whether to clear the thread counter when formatting a Tele-File.  
WHEN FORMAT: Clear the thread counter.  
TELE-FILE IN OUT INPUT Selects whether to continuously input log (IN and OUT point) data in the Tele-File  
CONTINUE  
menu screen.  
OFF : Do not continuously input log (IN and OUT point) data.  
ON : Continuously input log (IN and OUT point) data.  
Menu items in the range 200 to 299, relating to the remote control interface  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
201  
PARA RUN  
Select whether or not to use synchronized operation for two or more VTRs.  
DIS : No synchronized operation  
ENA: Use synchronized operation  
Note  
To use synchronized operation for two or more VTRs, set item 201 to “ENA” on  
all of the VTRs.  
202  
211  
CF FLAG (DVW-M2000P/ Select the mode for locking to the color framing sent from the remote controller.  
2000P only)  
8F : Eight-field locking mode  
4F/8F: Four- or eight-field locking mode  
REMOTE1 PORT  
Select how to use the REMOTE 1-IN(9P) and REMOTE 1-OUT(9P) connectors  
on the connector panel.  
i&o : Both the IN and OUT connectors are effective whether in local or remote  
mode.  
in: Only the IN connector is effective whether in local or remote mode.  
out: Only the OUT connector is effective whether in local or remote mode.  
panel: Allows you to select i&o, in, or out using the function menu.  
Note  
When selecting “panel”, first define user-defined function key RMT1 in the  
HOME2 page.  
On how to define user-defined function keys in the HOME2 page, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-11  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 300 to 399, relating to editing operations  
Settings  
VAR SPEED RANGE FOR Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable speed  
Item number Item name  
301  
SYNCHRONIZATION  
mode from a remote control unit connected to the REMOTE 1-IN(9P) connector  
or REMOTE 1-OUT (9P) connector.  
–1~+3 : For MPEG IMX tapes, analog tapes, and Digital Betacam tapes, from –1  
to +3 times normal speed; for Betacam SX tapes, –1 to +2 times normal  
speed.  
~+3.45: For MPEG IMX tapes, analog tapes, and Digital Betacam tapes, from  
–1 to +3.45 times normal speed; for Betacam SX tapes, –1.5 to +2.3 times  
normal speed.  
WIDE : Undefined  
302  
CAPSTAN RE-LOCKING In 525-line mode  
DIRECTION  
When the function menu item CAPSTN is set to 4F, select whether the capstan  
servo should lock by accelerating or decelerating.  
DECEL : Lock by decelerating.  
ACCEL: Lock by accelerating.  
In 625-line mode  
When the function menu item CAPSTN is set to 4F or 8F, select whether the  
capstan servo should lock by accelerating or decelerating.  
DECEL : Lock by decelerating.  
ACCEL : Lock by accelerating.  
304  
305  
306  
EDIT FIELD SELECT  
SYNC GRADE  
Select with which fields to start and end editing using tape.  
1F : Start editing with field 1 and end with field 2.  
2F: Start editing with field 2 and end with field 1.  
1F/2F: Start and end editing depending on the timing of command reception.  
When editing in phase-synchronized mode with menu item 004 set to ON, select  
the target phase synchronization accuracy.  
ACCUR : 0 frame accuracy  
ROUGH: 1 frame accuracy  
DMC INITIAL SPEED  
Select the initial speed automatically set when carrying out DMC editing.  
MANU : The speed determined by the rotation of the search dial  
PLAY: Normal playback speed  
STILL: Stationary  
0.03 to 1, +2: Speed set in the range 0.03 to +2 (select from +2, 1, 0.5,  
0.2, 0.1, 0.03)  
Note  
If you want to carry out DMC editing after setting this menu item, first press the  
DMC EDIT and DELETE buttons simultaneously to turn off the DMC EDIT button.  
307  
AUTO-DELETION FOR  
INCONSISTENT DATA  
Select what happens when an erroneous edit point is set.  
MANU : A warning is given by flashing the DELETE button on the lower control  
panel.  
The operator must manually delete the unnecessary edit points or correct the  
erroneous edit point.  
NEG&E: When inconsistent edit points are set, such as when an OUT point is  
before an IN point, or an audio OUT point is before an audio IN point, or when  
too many edit points are specified, the previously set edit point is deleted.  
NEG: When inconsistent edit points are set, such as when an OUT point is before  
an IN point, or an audio OUT point is before an audio IN point, the previously  
set edit point is deleted. When too many edit points are specified, the DELETE  
button on the control panel flashes to give a warning.  
Note  
Pressing the button corresponding to an edit point to be deleted and the DELETE  
button simultaneously, deletes the edit point. If an erroneous edit point is set (the  
DELETE button is flashing), editing is not executed.  
12-12  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 300 to 399, relating to editing operations (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
308  
SELECTION OF STD/  
NON-STD FOR  
COMPOSITE VIDEO IN  
Select the STD or NON-STD mode in accordance with a composite video input.  
AUTO : Detect automatically whether the input video luminance and chrominance  
signals are interleaved or not. If they are interleaved, select the STD mode. If  
they are not interleaved, select the NON-STD mode.  
STD: The STD mode is always used (forced STD mode).  
N-STD: Use this setting when color framing of the input video signal is unstable  
(forced NON-STD mode).  
309  
SERVO/AV REFERENCE Select the servo reference signal.  
SEL  
AUTO1 : During recording, an analog component/composite or digital input video  
signal is used as the servo reference signal. During playback, the signal  
selected by the function menu item OUTREF is used as the servo reference  
signal. If the signal selected by the OUTREF setting is not connected, an  
internal reference signal is used.  
AUTO2: When the function menu item OUTREF is set to REF, and any of the  
ASSEMBLE, VIDEO, AUDIO CH1 to CH8 and TC buttons is lit, the reference  
signal for video/audio signal processing is locked to the input video signal.  
EXT: The servo reference signal is forced to be “EXT” (an external reference  
video input signal is used).  
310  
REC INHIBIT  
Select the conditions under which recording is inhibited when the function menu  
item RECINH is set to ON.  
ALL : All tape recording is inhibited.  
CRASH: Normal tape recording is inhibited. Select this setting when you wish to  
carry out assemble editing.  
VIDEO: Inhibit recording of video and CTL signals.  
AUDIO: Inhibit recording of audio and CTL signals.  
Note  
When the function menu item RECINH is set to ON, the REC INHI indicator on  
the lower control panel lights. If an operation inhibited by this item is attempted,  
the REC INHI indicator flashes.  
311  
312  
313  
314  
315  
ANALOG AUDIO EDIT  
When using an editor (PVE-500, BVE-600, etc.) or a remote controller which  
PRESET REPLACE FOR cannot control digital audio edit preset, select how to activate edit preset of each  
CH1  
digital audio channel (channels 1 to 4) on this unit using the analog audio edit  
preset function of the editor or remote controller.  
Set edit preset of each digital audio channel of this unit on or off according to the  
analog audio preset specified by the remote controller or editor.  
NODEF: No definition.  
CH1: Follow edit preset of analog channel 1.  
CH2: Follow edit preset of analog channel 2.  
CH1+2: Follow edit preset of analog channel 1 or 2.  
The default settings for each item are as follows:  
ANALOG AUDIO EDIT  
PRESET REPLACE FOR  
CH2  
ANALOG AUDIO EDIT  
PRESET REPLACE FOR  
CH3  
ANALOG AUDIO EDIT  
PRESET REPLACE FOR  
CH4  
311: CH1  
312: CH2  
ANALOG AUDIO EDIT  
RESET REPLACE FOR  
CUE  
313: NODEF  
314: NODEF  
315: NODEF  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-13  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 300 to 399, relating to editing operations (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
316  
CONFIDENCE PB MODE Sets F3 (CONFI) in function menu HOME page to ENABLE.  
For settings of F3 (CONFI), see page 11-3.  
mode1: The CONFI playback function is only enabled during recording.  
mode2 : The CONFI playback function is also enabled during normal playback  
with the edit preset function being on, as well as during recording.  
mode3: The CONFI playback function is only enabled during crash recording.  
Note  
Playback is performed in advance mode during auto edit previewing regardless of  
the setting of this menu item.  
317  
AUDIO EDIT MODE  
Select the type of audio transition used for digital audio editing.  
CUT: Cut editing (audio discontinuity at transition point, and possible noise during  
playback).  
CROSS : Cross-fade  
IN/OUT  
t
IN/OUT  
FI/FO: Fade in and out  
t
t: Time set by item 803 DIGITAL AUDIO FADE TIME  
318  
319  
EDIT RETRY  
For two-VTR editing, set when this unit is used as the recorder. Selects the  
operation if the recorder was not synchronized in time.  
OFF: Editing is not carried out, and the unit stops.  
ON : The editing is automatically retried (up to twice).  
PREREAD SELECT  
Specify the preread operation.  
A/V : Preread for both audio and video.  
AUDIO: Preread for audio only.  
VIDEO: Preread for video only.  
The preread operation is enabled when the function menu item PREREAD is set  
to ON or with a command from the 9-pin remote control interface.  
320  
326  
DIGITAL AUDIO PB  
PROCESS ON EDIT  
POINT  
Select the treatment of audio playback at edit points.  
CUT : Carry out a cut (possibly resulting in audio discontinuities at the edit point).  
FADE: Fade out and fade in.  
AUTOMATIC IN ENTRY  
AFTER AUTO EDIT  
Select whether or not to automatically set the OUT point of the previous edit as  
the next IN point at the end of an automatic edit.  
OFF : No automatic setting  
R: Set recorder IN point automatically.  
R & P: Set recorder IN point automatically, and also player IN point in two-VTR  
editing.  
334  
336  
EE REFERENCE  
CONTROL  
Specify how to select the reference video signal in E-E mode.  
normal : Select according to the flowchart in Section 3-2-1 “External Sync Signal  
for the Internal Reference Video Signal Generator” (page 3-3).  
input : In E-E mode select the input video signal. When not in E-E mode, select  
according to the flowchart in Section 3-2-1 “External Sync Signal for the  
Internal Reference Video Signal Generator” (page 3-3).  
EDIT PRESET INHIBIT IN Specify which buttons are disabled in the editing mode setting section on the  
KEY PANEL CONTROL  
lower control panel.  
off : Disable all buttons.  
TC: Disable the TC button.  
12-14  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 400 to 499, relating to preroll  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
401  
FUNCTION MODE  
AFTER CUEUP  
Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing-up operation.  
STOP : Stop (the “stop mode”)  
STILL: Still playback (in search mode)  
Note  
When controlling this unit from an editor with the standard constants set, select  
“STOP”.  
402  
403  
405  
TIME REFERENCE FOR When prerolling a tape with time code discontinuities, select whether or not to use  
PREROLL  
CTL pulses to count time code from before a discontinuity.  
CTL : Use CTL pulses to count time code.  
TC: Do not use CTL pulses to count time code.  
AUTOMATIC PREROLL  
REFERENCE ENTRY  
Select whether or not the edit IN point is automatically set by pressing the  
PREROLL button, when the IN point is not set before starting preroll.  
DIS : IN point is not set automatically.  
ENA: IN point is set automatically.  
CUEUP BY CTL  
Select the tape transport mode when cuing. This setting is valid only when the  
function menu item CTL/TC is set to CTL.  
CAP. : During cuing up, the tape transport is in the “pinch ON” state (maximum  
tape speed 10 times normal).  
REEL : During cuing up, the tape transport is in the “pinch OFF” state. As the  
tape approaches the cue up point and the tape speed drops, the tape transport  
switches to the “pinch ON” state.a)  
To give priority to editing accuracy, select “CAP”.  
a) When controlled from an editor (BVE-2000/9100 etc.),  
selecting “REEL” allows high-speed cuing up.  
Menu items in the range 500 to 599, relating to tape protection  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
501  
STILL TIMER  
Select the time delay from the tape transport stopping (either the “stop mode” or  
the still playback mode in search mode) until the unit automatically switches to  
the tape protection mode, in order to protect the video heads and the tape.  
0.5S ... 8M ... 30M: Set the value in the range 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes.  
502  
TAPE PROTECTION  
MODE FROM SEARCH  
Select the operation of the protection mode to protect the video heads and tape  
when in the still playback mode in search mode (jog/shuttle).  
STEP : Step forward at 1/30 normal speed every 2 seconds.  
STDBY: Switch to “Standby OFF mode” (the unit not on standby).  
T.REL: Switch to tension release mode (the tape tension slackened).  
503  
TAPE PROTECTION  
MODE FROM STOP  
Select the operation of the protection mode to protect the video heads and tape  
when stopped (the “stop mode”).  
STDBY : Switch to “Standby OFF mode” (the unit not on standby).  
T.REL: Switch to tension release mode (the tape tension slackened).  
504  
505  
DRUM ROTATION IN  
STANDBY OFF  
Select whether the drum rotates in “Standby OFF mode”.  
OFF : Drum does not rotate.  
ON: Drum rotates.  
STILL TENSION  
Select the tape tension state in the still playback mode.  
NORM : Normal tape tension is maintained during still playback mode, ready for  
playback.  
LOOSE: Reduce the tape tension further from the NORM setting. (Select  
“LOOSE” when the unit is on standby for a long period of still playback, for  
example, in a library management system (LMS).)  
Note  
When LOOSE is selected, playback cannot be guaranteed.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-15  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 600 to 699, relating to the time code generator  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
VITC POSITION SEL-1  
601  
602  
603  
In 525-line mode  
Select a line to insert the VITC in.  
12H ... 16H ... 20H: Select any line from 12 to 20.  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both  
items 601 and 602.  
In 625-line mode  
Select a line to insert the VITC in.  
9H ... 19H ... 22H: Select any line from 9 to 22.  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both  
items 601 and 602.  
VITC POSITION SEL-2  
In 525-line mode  
Select a line to insert the VITC in.  
12H ... 18H ... 20H: Select any line from 12 to 20.  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both  
items 601 and 602.  
In 625-line mode  
Select a line to insert the VITC in.  
9H ... 21H ... 22H: Select any line from 9 to 22.  
Note  
You can insert the VITC signal in two places. To insert it in two places, set both  
items 601 and 602.  
ID CODE PRESET  
Select whether or not to set the ID code.  
OFF : Do not set the ID code.  
ON: Set the ID code.  
To set the ID code:  
Press the F5 (SET) button with this menu item displayed in the menu display, to  
enter the ID code setting mode. You can then set the user ID digit by digit using  
the T and t buttons for digit selection. When all required digits have been set  
correctly, press the F5 (SET) button again to save the ID code and exit from the  
ID code setting mode.  
604  
605  
ID CODE SW  
Select whether or not to record the ID code set using item 603 in the user bits.  
OFF : Record the normal data in the user bits.  
ON: Record the ID code in the user bits.  
TCG REGEN MODE  
Select the signals to be regenerated when the time code generator is in the  
regeneration mode (i.e., when the function menu item TCG (F2) is set to  
REGEN).  
TC&UB : Both the time code and user bit signals are regenerated.  
TC: Only the time code signal is regenerated.  
UB: Only the user bit signal is regenerated.  
12-16  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 600 to 699, relating to the time code generator (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
606  
TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN  
REGEN MODE  
Select the signal output from the TIME CODE OUT connector during normal (×1)  
speed playback in the following cases:  
• For tape playback when the function menu item TCG (F1) is set to INT and TCG  
(F2) set to REGEN.  
• For preroll or postroll playback during automatic editing with the tape.  
TAPE: During tape playback, the playback time code signal is output without  
regeneration. (The time code values do not correspond to the video output.)  
REGEN : The playback time code is output after regeneration.  
AUTO: The operation with the AUTO setting is as follows.  
• The playback time code (LTC) signal is output delayed, to coincide with the  
output video signal.  
• Operation is independent of the internal time code generator settings or editing  
state.  
• The output video signal and LTC are only accurately synchronized for normal  
speed playback.  
• If the edit preset is turned on or off, the delay changes, and therefore the time  
code will be discontinuous.  
607  
U-BIT BINARY GROUP  
FLAG  
Select the user bits to be used in the time code generated by the time code  
generator.  
000 : Character set not specified  
001: 8-bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and ISO 2022  
010: Undefined  
011: Undefined  
100: Undefined  
101: SMPTE 262M page/line multiplex system  
110: Undefined  
111: Undefined  
608  
609  
PHASE CORRECTION  
TCG CF FLAG  
Select whether or not to carry out phase correction control on the LTC generated  
by the time code generator.  
OFF : No control  
ON: Carry out control.  
Select whether or not the color framing flag is set in the blank bit of the time code  
data.  
OFF : Color framing flag is not set.  
ON: Color framing flag is set.  
AUTO: Color framing flag is set or not depending upon the color framing phase  
relationship between the recorded video signal and the time code signal.  
When AUTO is selected, color framing is controlled as follows according to the  
operating mode of the time code generator.  
• In INT PRESET mode (the function menu item TCG (F1) is set to INT and TCG  
(F2) set to PRESET, and in modes other than the automatic editing mode): the  
time code signal is generated with color framing locked to the video signal, and  
the color framing flag is set.  
• In INT REGEN mode (the function menu item TCG (F1) is set to INT and TCG  
(F2) set to REGEN, and in the automatic editing mode), and also in EXT mode  
(the function menu item TCG (F1) is set to EXT): the time code signal is  
generated without color framing locked to the video signal, and the color framing  
flag is not set.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-17  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 600 to 699, relating to the time code generator (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
610  
REGEN CONTROL  
MODE  
In editing performed using the control panel of this unit, select whether or not the  
time code is automatically regenerated.  
AS&IN : In automatic editing with this unit as the recorder, regardless of the  
settings of the function menu items TCG (F1) and TCG (F2), in assemble and  
insert editing, the time code generator regenerates according to the time code  
on the tape.  
ASSEM: In automatic editing with this unit as the recorder, regardless of the  
settings of the function menu items TCG (F1) and TCG (F2), in assemble  
editing only, the time code generator regenerates according to the time code  
on the tape.  
MANU: Regardless of whether this unit is the recorder or player, the time code  
generator operates in accordance with the settings of the function menu items  
TCG (F1) and TCG (F2).  
FULL: Whether local or remote and regardless of the settings of the function  
menu items TCG (F1) and TCG (F2), when any of the ASSEMBLE, VIDEO,  
AUDIO CH1 to CH8, and TC buttons is lit, the time code generator regenerates  
according to the time code played back from the tape.  
651  
UMID OUTPUT  
Select UMID output and the UMID type.  
off : Do not output UMID.  
BASIC: Output Basic UMID.  
EXTENDED: Output Extended UMID.  
Notes  
• Even if EXTENDED is selected, Basic UMID is output if Basic UMID is recorded  
on the tape being played back.  
• When menu item 901 VIDEO OUTPUT DATA is set to “8 bit”, nothing of UMID is  
output regardless of the setting of this menu item.  
652  
654  
655  
UMID SD VANC LINE  
Specify the SDI signal VANC line into which the UMID should be inserted.  
12H, 13H, 15H, 16H, 17H , 18H, 19H (DVW-M2000/2000)  
9H, 10H, 12H, 13H, 14H, 15H, 16H, 17H , 18H (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
Notes  
• When SDI signals containing a UMID are output in E-E mode, the output VANC  
line follows the input VANC line, regardless of the setting of this item.  
• The output VANC line during playback follows the setting for recording.  
UMID GENERATE  
METHOD  
Select the Instance No. generation method when the UMID is inherited.  
copy No. + 16bit PRS : Copy No. + 16-bit random number  
24bit PRS: 24-bit random number  
Note  
When menu item 656 is set to NEW (an Instance Number indicating that this is  
the original is generated), the same value (all zeros) is generated regardless of  
which of the above methods is selected.  
UMID RECORDING  
Select the UMID type to be recorded to tape.  
off : Do not record UMID.  
BASIC: Record Basic UMID.  
EXTENDED: Record Extended UMID.  
12-18  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 600 to 699, relating to the time code generator (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
656  
MATERIAL NO.  
Select whether to inherit the UMID in the input signal when recording a UMID.  
INPUT : Inherit the UMID in the input signal, if it is present.  
• Even when INPUT is selected, a new UMID is generated if the input signal  
does not contain UMID data (the same behavior as when NEW is selected).  
• When recording with inherited data, the Instance Number is newly generated  
according to menu item 654, changing to a value that indicates that “this is a  
copy”.  
• When the UMID in the input signal is a Basic UMID, a Basic UMID is  
recorded, even if menu item 655 is set to EXTENDED.  
• When the UMID in the input signal is an Extended UMID, the recorded UMID  
follows the setting of menu item 655.  
NEW: Generate a new UMID, regardless of whether or not the input signal  
contains a UMID.  
• The Basic section does not change during recording.  
• An Instance Number indicating that “this is the original” is generated.  
• The Source Pack Date/Time (when) changes with each frame.  
• The Source Pack Spatial Co-ordinates (where) are not recorded.  
• The Source Pack Stored Ownership (who) can be set. (See the section “To  
set Stored Ownership” (page 8-2)).  
657  
658  
ESSENCE MARK TAPE  
OUTPUT  
Select whether or not to output essence marks recorded on the tape during  
playback.  
off : Do not output.  
on: Output.  
Note  
When menu item 901 VIDEO OUTPUT DATA is set to “8 bit”, nothing of UMID is  
output regardless of the setting of this menu item.  
SHOT MARK ESSENCE  
MARK CONVERT  
Select whether or not to convert into essence marks and output shot marks  
recorded in the LTC track which are detected during playback.  
off : Do not output.  
SHOTM: Output.  
Depending on the type of the detected shot marks, the output essence marks are  
“_RecStart”, “_ShotMark1”, or “_ShotMark2”.  
Notes  
• Of the shot marks, post marks are not converted to essence marks.  
• Shot mark detection timing depends on playback conditions.  
• When menu item 901 VIDEO OUTPUT DATA is set to “8 bit”, nothing of UMID is  
output regardless of the setting of this menu item.  
659  
660  
AED ESSENCE MARK  
CONVERT  
Select whether or not to convert into essence marks and output events detected  
during playback by the AED (Auto Event Detector).  
off : Do not output.  
on: Output.  
Note  
When menu item 901 VIDEO OUTPUT DATA is set to “8 bit”, nothing of UMID is  
output regardless of the setting of this menu item.  
ESSENCE MARK SD  
VANC LINE  
Specify the VANC line into which to insert essence marks during video recording  
and playback.  
12H, 13H, 15H, 16H, 17H , 18H, 19H (DVW-M2000/2000)  
9H, 10H, 12H, 13H, 14H, 15H, 16H, 17H , 18H (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
Notes  
• The output VANC line during playback follows the setting for recording.  
• The VANC line for SDI signal E-E output of essence marks contained in the  
input SDI signal follows the input.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-19  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 600 to 699, relating to the time code generator (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
ESSENCE MARK INPUT Select whether or not to record essence marks contained in the video input.  
661  
RECORD  
off : Do not record.  
on: Record.  
662  
ESSENCE MARK SELF  
RECORD  
Select whether or not to record to tape essence marks generated by this unit  
when recording video.  
Sub items  
1
2
3
crash rec  
assemble  
insert  
Select whether or not to record essence marks during crash recording.  
off : Do not record.  
on: Record “_RecStart” essence mark in the recording start frame.  
Select whether or not to record essence marks during assemble edit recording.  
off : Do not record.  
on: Record “_RecStart” essence mark in the recording start frame.  
Select whether or not to record essence marks during insert edit recording.  
off : Do not record.  
on: Record “_RecStart” essence mark in the recording start frame, and record  
“_RecEnd” essence mark in the recording end frame.  
663  
UMID OUT DUP  
Select whether, when playing back (PLAY) Digital Betacam, to output UMID data  
recorded in the 1st field to the 2nd field.  
OFF : UMID is not output to the 2nd field when essence marks are recorded in  
the 2nd field.  
ON: Output the same UMID as the 1st field to the 2nd field.  
UMID or essence marks are recorded in the 2nd field.  
When it is necessary to record both UMID and essence marks, essence marks  
are recorded and UMID is not recorded in the 2nd field.  
664  
DIGITAL BETACAM  
ESSENCE MARK OUT  
SHIFT  
Select whether or not, when using a Digital Betacam player, to output to the next  
frame (1st/2nd field) essence mark data which is recorded in the 2nd field.  
off : Do not output essence marks to the next frame.  
on: Output essence marks to the next frame (do not output in original frame).  
12-20  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 700 to 799, relating to video control  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
701  
SELECTION OF VIDEO/  
SYNC DELAY  
In E-E mode the video signal is output delayed with respect to the video input  
signal by the time for video circuit processing. With this item, select whether or  
not to delay the sync signal attached to the output video signal by an amount  
corresponding to the delay.  
SYNC : Delay the sync signal by the corresponding amount before attaching it.  
VIDEO: Attach a sync signal with the same timing as the input signal.  
703  
BLANK LINE SELECT  
Switch blanking on or off for individual lines in the vertical blanking interval. The  
Y/C signal and odd/even fields are blanked simultaneously.  
Note  
For playback of an analog Betacam cassette (Betacam SP, etc.) regardless of the  
setting of this item, the chrominance signal is blanked up to line 15.  
Sub-Item  
ALL LINE  
0
- - - : Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
BLANK: Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, blank all lines which can be  
specified in this menu item.  
THROU: Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, switch off blanking for all  
lines which can be specified in this menu item.  
DVW-M2000/ 12 ...  
LINE 12 ... LINE  
19  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19.  
BLANK : Carry out blanking.  
THROU: Switch off blanking.  
2000  
19  
20  
LINE 20  
Specify blanking for lines 20.  
BLANK : Carry out blanking.  
HALF: Carry out half-blanking.  
THROU: Switch off blanking.  
DVW-  
M2000P/  
2000P  
9 ... 22 LINE 9 ... LINE 22 Specify blanking for lines 9 to 22.  
BLANK : Carry out blanking.  
THROU: Switch off blanking.  
23  
LINE 23  
Specify blanking for lines 23.  
HALF : Carry out half-blanking.  
THROU: Switch off blanking.  
704  
DECODE Y/C SEP MODE Select the method of processing the input video signal in the vertical blanking  
interval, independently for each line.  
Sub-Item  
DVW-M2000/  
2000  
Make the selection for lines 12 to 20.  
BPF: Carry out Y/C separation.  
B&W : Treat all as luminance signals.  
12 ...  
20  
LINE 12 ... LINE  
20  
21...  
22  
LINE 21 ... LINE  
22  
Make the selection for lines 21 to 22.  
BPF: Carry out Y/C separation.  
B&W: Treat all as luminance signals.  
COMB : Process with an appropriate Y/C separation.  
DVW-  
M2000P/  
2000P  
Make the selection for lines 9 to 22.  
BPF: Carry out Y/C separation.  
B&W : Treat all as luminance signals.  
9 ... 22 LINE 9 ... LINE 22  
705  
EDGE SUBCARRIER  
REDUCER MODE  
During recording and playback of a composite signal, in the playback circuit the  
edge subcarrier reducer (ESR) is automatically switched on or off according to  
the VTR operation. When recording a “Non-Standard” signal, for example, if the  
color edges are not as good as with a proper signal, the ESR can be forced on.  
This item makes this selection.  
AUTO : ESR is switched on and off automatically.  
ON: ESR operation is forced on.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-21  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 700 to 799, relating to video control (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
707  
FORCED VERTICAL  
INTERPOLATION OFF  
The “Y-add” functiona) is normally switched on automatically during jog or variable  
speed playback. This item selects whether or not to force the “Y-add” function off.  
AUTO : Automatically switch the “Y-add” function on.  
OFF: Force the “Y-add” function off.  
709  
CAV LEVEL FORMAT  
(DVW-M2000/M2000P  
only)  
Select whether the analog component input/output should be D-1 or Betacam.  
Format  
Color bars  
Y Video  
Y Sync  
300 mV  
286 mV  
R–Y/B–Y  
700 mV  
700 mV  
D-1 CAV  
Betacam  
100/0/100/0  
700 mV  
100/7.5/77/7.5 714 mV  
Sub-Item  
0
INPUT CAV  
LEVEL  
Select the analog component input format.  
B-CAM : Betacam  
D1: D-1  
1
OUTPUT CAV Select the analog component output format.  
LEVEL  
B-CAM : Betacam  
D1: D-1  
710  
INTERNAL VIDEO  
SIGNAL GENERATOR  
Select the test signal to be output from the VTR’s internal test signal generator.  
OFF: No test signal is generated. (The VTR operates normally.)  
CB100 : 100% color bar signal  
CB100 : 100% color bar signal (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
CB75 : 75% color bar signal (DVW-M2000/2000)  
CB75R: 75% color bar signal (reverse)  
BOW: Bowtie signal  
PLSBR: Pulse & bar signal  
MLTBS: Multi-burst signal  
HSWP: H sweep signal  
5STEP: 5-step signal  
RAMP: Ramp signal  
SH: Shallow ramp signal  
RED: Red signal  
GRAY: 50% flat signal  
WHITE: 100% flat signal  
BB: Black burst signal  
SDI: SDI check field signal  
NTC7: NTC 7 test signal (DVW-M2000/2000)  
LN330: Line 330 test signal (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
To turn on the internal test signal generator, hold the F1 (VID.IN) button in  
function menu HOME page for three seconds or more with this menu item set to  
other than OFF. When the test signal generator is turned on, the display of the  
VID.IN setting changes to SG. To turn off the test signal generator, press the F1  
(VID.IN) button in function menu HOME page again.  
a) The “Y-add” function is a circuit operation to interpolate  
the video signal vertically during jog or variable speed  
playback for the purpose of reducing the vertical  
movement of the playback picture.  
12-22  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 700 to 799, relating to video control (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
712  
VIDEO PROCESS ON  
CAP LOCK 2FIELD  
When the function menu item CAPSTN or menu item 106 is set to 2F for 2-field  
playback, select whether or not to carry out a “picture shift”.  
OFF : No picture shift  
ON: Carry out picture shift.  
Note  
To eliminate the adverse effect of the residual chrominance subcarrier component  
in the Y signal that is the result of the Y/C separation, this unit automatically  
applies a shift to the playback image in the H direction, so that even in 2-field  
playback a satisfactory image can be obtained.  
713  
VIDEO SETUP  
REFERENCE LEVEL  
(DVW-M2000 only)  
Set the video setup amounts to be removed from a recording signal and Betacam  
playback signal, and to be added to a composite output signal. There are  
independent settings for a recording signal (referred to below as an input signal),  
a Betacam signal, and a composite output signal (referred to below as an output  
signal).  
Notes  
• Setup removal is carried out only with respect to a Betacam format CAV input  
signal (menu setting) and NTSC composite input signal. It is not carried out with  
respect to other input signals.  
• The setup amounts specified in this menu item have no connection with the  
function menu item SETUP.  
Sub-Item  
0
MASTER LEVEL  
When the input signal, Betacam playback signal, and output signal settings are  
“MSTER” (master), the setup amount specified for this sub-item is removed from  
the input signal and Betacam playback signal, and is added to the output signal.  
0.0% ... 7.5% ... 10.0%: Setting in this range, in 0.5% increments.  
1
2
INPUT LEVEL  
MSTER : Set the input signal to the master setting.  
0.0% ... 7.5% ... 10.0%: Set the setup amount to be removed from the input signal  
in this range, in 0.5% increments.  
INPUT VBLK CONT  
REMOV: Remove the setup amount in the vertical blanking interval of the input  
signal.  
THROU : Do not remove the setup amount in the vertical blanking interval of the  
input signal.  
3
4
BETACAM PB LEVEL MSTER : Set the Betacam playback signal to the master setting.  
(DVW-M2000/M2000P) 0.0% ... 7.5% ... 10.0%: Set the setup amount to be removed from the Betacam  
playback signal in this range, in 0.5% increments.  
OUTPUT LEVEL  
MSTER : Set the output signal to the master setting.  
0.0% ... 7.5% ... 10.0%: Set the setup amount to be added to the output signal in  
this range, in 0.5% increments.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-23  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 700 to 799, relating to video control (Continued)  
(Items 715 to 721: Settings for controlling the video processing system according to the menu settings)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
715  
716  
717  
718  
VIDEO GAIN CONTROL  
Adjust the video output level.  
–2048 to 0 to +848  
CHROMA GAIN  
CONTROL  
Adjust the chroma output level.  
–2048 to 0 to +848  
CHROMA PHASE  
CONTROL  
Adjust the chroma phase.  
–128 to 0 to +127  
SETUP LEVEL (DVW-  
M2000/2000)/BLACK  
LEVEL (DVW-M2000P/  
2000P)  
Adjust the setup level (black level).  
–272 to 0 to +272  
719  
720  
721  
SYSTEM PHASE SYNC  
Adjust the output signal sync phase.  
–128 to 0 to +127  
SYSTEM PHASE SC  
Adjust the output signal subcarrier phase.  
0 to 1023  
Y/C DELAY (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P only)  
For playback from an analog Betacam cassette, adjust the Y/C delay.  
–2048 to 0 to +2047  
Note  
When it is set to MENU, all controls for video output  
processing on the control panel are disabled.  
When you make settings for items 715 to 721, set the  
function menu item V.PROC to MENU.  
Item number Item name  
723 INPUT VIDEO BLANK  
Settings  
Switch blanking on or off for individual lines in the vertical blanking interval of an  
input video signal. The Y/C signal and odd/even fields are blanked  
simultaneously.  
Sub-Item  
ALL LINE  
A signal with blanking carried out according to this setting is recorded.  
0
- - - : Specify the blanking for each line separately.  
BLANK: Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, blank all lines which can be  
specified in this menu item.  
THROU: Regardless of the setting of other sub-items, switch off blanking for all  
lines which can be specified in this menu item.  
DVW-M2000/ 12 ...  
LINE 12 ... LINE  
20  
Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20.  
BLANK: Carry out blanking.  
THROU : Switch off blanking.  
2000  
20  
DVW-  
M2000P/  
2000P  
9 ... 22 LINE 9 ... LINE 22 Specify blanking for lines 9 to 22.  
BLANK: Carry out blanking.  
THROU : Switch off blanking.  
12-24  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 700 to 799, relating to video control (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
726  
H BLANKING WIDTH  
Select the horizontal blanking width of the video output signal.  
NAROW : Digital blanking (narrow)  
WIDE: Analog blanking (wide)  
When WIDE is selected, the horizontal blanking width complies with RS170A, and  
normally the blanking is widened and the image becomes narrower. It is  
recommended to select NAROW at the editing stage, then later, for broadcast  
transmission to select WIDE, to output a signal conforming to the standard. Note,  
however, that NAROW has to be always selected for SDI signals.  
727  
VIDEO EDIT PREVIEW  
SWITCHER  
Set the output phase for the video playback signal when any of the ASSEMBLE,  
VIDEO, AUDIO CH1 to CH4, CUE, and TC buttons is lit.  
INT : The video playback signal output phase is the same as the output phase in  
E-E mode. Use this setting when editing with a single VTR, or when  
previewing while watching the VTR output signal.  
EXT: The video playback signal output phase is the same as the phase of an  
input video signal or external reference signal.  
Note  
Whichever setting is used, the correct editing results will be obtained. When,  
however, you are using an external switcher to switch the video output signal  
from this unit for the purposes of preview, select EXT. This will prevent any  
image shifts at editing IN and OUT points.  
728  
733  
OUTPUT SCH PHASE  
C.PHASE TYPE  
Set the subcarrier H phase.  
–2048 to 0 to +2047  
Select the PAL chroma phase type. (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
HUE : Vary the hue.  
L.ALT: Vary the SC phase of composite output.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-25  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 800 to 899, relating to audio control  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
801  
DIGITAL JOG SOUND  
Turns the digital jog sound on and off.  
OFF: Digital jog sound is turned off.  
Audio of digital channels not subjected to speed correction is output. When  
the tape stops, after one second the audio is muted.  
ON : Digital jog sound is turned on.  
When the tape speed is in the range × –1 to × 1 (for Betacam SX playback, in  
the range × –1 to × 2), speed correction is carried out, and the same jog  
sound as a conventional analog VTR is output.  
802  
803  
DIGITAL AUDIO MUTE IN Set the digital audio muting conditions during shuttle playback.  
SHUTTLE MODE  
OFF : Not muted.  
CUEUP: Muted during cue-up or preroll operations.  
FULL: Muted in shuttle mode.  
DIGITAL AUDIO FADE  
TIME  
Specify the time for cross-fade or fade in/out editing of audio signals.  
5 ms, 10 ms , 15 ms, 20 ms, 25 msa), 50 msb), 85 ms, 115 msc)  
Note  
The cross-fade or fade in/out operation means that the recording is rewritten from  
the OUT point for the length specified by this setting. Even at the minimum 5 ms  
setting, a length of recording corresponding to a field is rewritten.  
To avoid rewriting, set menu item 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE to “CUT”, but in this  
case there is an audio discontinuity at the edit point. There is no effect on the  
recorded video signal.  
805  
806  
AUDIO MONITOR  
OUTPUT MIXING  
Select the audio mixing method used for digital audio signals and Betacam  
playback analog audio signals supplied to the MONITOR OUTPUT connector.  
ADD: Simple addition  
RMS : Root-mean-square  
AVE: Simple average  
LEVEL METER SCALE  
Select the mode in which digital audio levels are displayed.  
PEAK.0 : Displays the audio level as negative values with the maximum level set  
to 0 dB.  
REF.0: Displays the audio level as positive and negative values with the  
reference level set to 0 dB.  
a) Cross-fade time is 24 ms.  
b) Actual value is 49 ms.  
c) Actual value is 114 ms.  
12-26  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 800 to 899, relating to audio control (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
807  
AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE Select the output timing of digital audio playback signals: (SDI and AES/EBU  
only). The reference position corresponds to a setting of 80H; when the setting is  
less than 80H, the output timing is advanced, and when it is higher than 80H,  
the output timing is delayed. (at 80H, 128 samples = approx. 2.7 ms, and 1  
sample=approx. 20 µs)  
0 ... 80 ... FF : Setting in this range  
808  
INTERNAL AUDIO  
SIGNAL GENERATOR  
Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator.  
OFF : No operation  
SILNC: Silent signal  
1KHZ: At 1 kHz, –20 dB FS sine wave is supplied to all audio input channels.  
To turn on the internal audio test signal generator, set this menu item to other  
than OFF, then hold the audio signal selection button for CH1 (channel 1) for  
three seconds or more. When the test signal generator is turned on, the input  
signal indicator in the audio setting display section turns off. To turn off the test  
signal generator, press the audio signal selection button for any of CH1 to CH4  
(channels 1 to 4).  
809  
810  
AUDIO LEVEL METER  
DIMMER CONTROL  
Set the brightness of the audio level meters.  
0 ... 7: Set in this range. 0 is the brightest, and 7 the dimmest.  
AUDIO EDIT PREVIEW  
SWITCHER  
Set the output phase for the audio playback signal when any of the ASSEMBLE,  
VIDEO, AUDIO CH1 to CH4, CUE, and TC buttons is lit.  
INT : The audio playback signal output phase is the same as the output phase in  
the E-E mode. Use this setting when editing with a single VTR, or when  
previewing while watching the VTR output signal.  
EXT: The audio playback signal output phase is the same as the phase of an  
input video signal or external reference video signal.  
Note  
Whichever setting is used, the correct editing results will be obtained. When,  
however, you are using an external switcher to switch the audio output signal  
from this unit for the purposes of preview, selecting EXT will prevent any muting  
or discontinuities in the audio at editing IN and OUT points.  
815  
AUDIO SAMPLING RATE Select the mode of operation of the sampling rate converter for AES/EBU input to  
CONVERTER  
channels 1 to 4.  
OFF : No operation  
44kHz: Operate. Choose this setting when the input signal sampling frequency is  
44 to 48 kHz.  
32kHz: Operate. Choose this setting when the input signal sampling frequency is  
32 kHz.  
(Continued)  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-27  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 800 to 899, relating to audio control (Continued)  
Item number Item name Settings  
823  
NAU FLG PB  
Sub-item  
Controls the non-audio flag when the playback format is Digital Betacam or  
Betacam SX.  
1
2
3
CH1/CH2  
During playback (except E-E mode), sets the digital audio non-audio flag as  
follows.  
OFF : OFF (the data is audio)  
ON: ON (the data is non-audio)  
AUTO: As follows, depending on whether tape data has been confirmed.  
CH3/CH4  
CCH5/CH6  
(DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
Valid only for an  
MPEG IMX format  
8-channel  
• Tape data has been read and confirmed: ON or OFF, according to the data.  
• Tape data has not been confirmed: Current state is maintained.  
Notes  
recording tape  
• During playback of analog tapes, the non-audio flag is OFF regardless of the  
setting of this item.  
• In the MPEG IMX format, operation is the same as for the OFF setting or AUTO  
setting.  
4
CH7/CH8  
(DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
Valid only for an  
MPEG IMX format  
8-channel  
• Recording operation follows the setting of maintenance menu item M372.  
For more information about the maintenance menu item M372, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
recording tape  
824  
ANALOG OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Select the analog audio signals (tracks 1 to 8) to be assigned to audio output  
channels 1 to 4.  
Note  
The settings tr5/6 and tr7/8 are only valid for MPEG IMX playback on the DVW-  
M2000/M2000P.  
Sub-item  
1
CH1/CH2  
tr1/2 : Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 1 and 2  
tr3/4: Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 1 and 2  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 1 and 2  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 1 and 2  
2
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2: Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 3 and 4  
tr3/4 : Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 3 and 4  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 3 and 4  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 3 and 4  
AUDIO ADVANCE MODE Set the audio signal output phase.  
OFF : Same as the video output phase  
825  
ON: One frame ahead of the video output phase  
12-28  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu items in the range 800 to 899, relating to audio control (Continued)  
Item number Item name  
Settings  
826  
AUDIO PB VOLUME  
SELECT  
Selects which PB control knobs are assigned to control playback of digital audio  
channels.  
(DVW-M2000/M2000P  
only)  
Sub-item  
0
ALL CH  
DEFAULT : Use the following settings.  
CH1: Control knob 1  
CH2: Control knob 2  
CH3: Control knob 3  
CH4: Control knob 4  
CH5: Unity  
CH6: Unity  
CH7: Unity  
CH8: Unity  
UNITY: Set all channels to unity, and disable the control knobs.  
MENU: Use the following menu settings.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
UNITY: Set playback level to unity.  
VOL1: Assign playback level control to control knob 1.  
VOL2: Assign playback level control to control knob 2.  
VOL3: Assign playback level control to control knob 3.  
VOL4: Assign playback level control to control knob 4.  
Select the audio signals (tracks 1 to 8) to be assigned to AES/EBU digital audio  
output tracks 1 to 4.  
827  
AES/EBU AUDIO  
OUTPUT SELECT  
Note  
The settings tr5/6 and tr7/8 are only valid for MPEG IMX playback on the DVW-  
M2000/M2000P.  
Sub-item  
1
CH1/CH2  
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2 : Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
2
tr1/2: Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4 : Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
828  
SDI AUDIO OUTPUT  
SELECT  
Select the audio signals (tracks 1 to 8) to be assigned to SDI audio signal output  
channels.  
Note  
The settings tr5/6 and tr7/8 are only valid for MPEG IMX playback on the DVW-  
M2000/M2000P.  
Sub-item  
1
CH1/CH2  
CH3/CH4  
tr1/2 : Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr3/4: Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 1 and 2.  
2
tr1/2: Assign tracks 1 and 2 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr3/4 : Assign tracks 3 and 4 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr5/6: Assign tracks 5 and 6 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
tr7/8: Assign tracks 7 and 8 to audio output channels 3 and 4.  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-29  
12-4 Items in the Extended Setup Menu  
Menu items in the range 900 to 999, relating to digital processing  
Settings  
Item number Item name  
901  
VIDEO OUTPUT DATA  
Set the bit length for SDI video output data.  
8bit: Set the bit length to 8 bits.  
10bit : Set the bit length to 10 bits.  
It is recommended that you select the optimal setting for the device to which you  
are going to connect this unit.  
903  
FREEZE MODE  
Select the freeze mode and freeze timing.  
FIELD : Freeze a video field. Field may be odd or even, according to the timing.  
FLD1: Freeze an odd field.  
FLD2: Freeze an even field.  
FRM12: Freeze a frame consisting of an odd field and following even field.  
FRM21: Freeze a frame consisting of an even field and following odd field.  
Odd and even fields are distinguished by the reference video signal.  
Changing the menu setting during a freeze does not affect the freeze image.  
The setting is reflected the next time a freeze is carried out.  
You can freeze an image using the DELETE button and TRIM + button.  
For details, see menu item 904.  
904  
FREEZE CONTROL  
FROM KEY PANEL  
Determine how the buttons used to freeze an image function.  
MOMNT : Holding the DELETE button and pressing the TRIM + button carries out  
a freeze. The freeze ends when the buttons are released.  
LATCH: Holding the DELETE button and pressing the TRIM + button carries out  
a freeze. The freeze continues even after the buttons are released.  
• To update the freeze image  
Hold the DELETE button and press the TRIM + button again.  
• To end the freeze  
Hold the DELETE button and press the TRIM – button.  
905  
AUTO FREEZE  
CONTROL  
Set the auto freeze function operation (conditions for ending a freeze, etc.).  
In normal playback, if there is a sudden worsening of the channel condition (entry  
into unrecorded area), this function freezes the image.  
DIS : Disable the auto freeze function.  
MODE1: End the freeze when signals which can be recorded normally are  
restored.  
MODE2: End freeze automatically on playback after stopping.  
• The automatic freeze mode is determined by item 903.  
• The freeze is ended immediately, regardless of the above conditions, when this  
unit is switched to any of the following modes:  
Eject  
EDIT preset on  
Cue up  
Recording  
906  
920  
STOP FREEZE  
CONTROL  
Select whether or not the STOP FREEZE function should operate.  
DIS : Does not operate.  
ENA: Operates.  
SD-SDI H-ANC  
Sub-item  
Select whether or not to add information to the SDI output.  
Select whether to add digital audio data channels 5 to 8 (ON), or not (OFF).  
Select whether to add RP-188 time code data (ON), or not (OFF).  
1
AUDIO 5CH-8CH  
(DVW-M2000/  
M2000P only)  
ON  
OFF  
2
RP-188 ATC  
ON  
OFF  
12-30  
Chapter 12 Setup Menus  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-1 Overview of Setup Utility Menu Functions  
You can use the setup utility menu to download files  
13-1-1 Using Memory Stick Data  
saved in memory sticks, to upload files to memory  
sticks, and to format memory sticks from MS-DOS.  
Refer to the Maintenance manual Volume 1 for more  
Call up the setup utility menu from the function menu.  
information about downloading, uploading, and formatting  
operations.  
See Section 11-2 “Function Menu Item List” (page 11-3) for  
more information about the function menu.  
To download files saved in memory sticks  
See Section 3-6 “Using a Memory Stick” (page 3-12) for  
more information about memory sticks.  
Proceed as follows.  
1 Press the F1 (DNLOAD) button.  
To display the setup utility menu  
The menu display changes, allowing you to  
execute the download. The name of the currently  
selected file is flashing on the screen.  
Display page 5 of the function menu in the menu  
display section, and press the F5 (SUPUTL) button.  
DOWNLOAD SETUP - DBMNRXXX.SUP  
SUP  
UTL  
The setup utility menu appears in the menu display  
section.  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
SETUP MENU UTILITY (MEMORY STICK)  
DNLOAD UPLOAD FORMAT  
SUP  
UTL  
EXIT  
F6  
2 With the HOME button held down, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to select the file to  
download.  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
This menu provides the following functions.  
3 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to display  
F1 (DNLOAD): Downloads data from the memory  
stick.  
F2 (UPLOAD): Uploads data to the memory stick.  
F3 (FORMAT): Formats the memory stick.  
“EXEC OFF”.  
DOWNLOAD SETUP - EXEC OFF  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
To return to the page 5 screen  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
4 With the HOME button held down, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to switch EXEC OFF to  
EXEC ON.  
To display the setup utility menu on a monitor  
Connect a monitor to the COMPOSITE VIDEO  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) or SDI OUTPUT 3 (SUPER)  
connector of this unit.  
DOWNLOAD SETUP - EXEC ON  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
When you want to redo a file selection, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to display the file name  
again, then go back to step 2.  
SETUP MENU UTILITY  
MEMORY STICK  
F1:SETUP MENU DOWNLOAD  
F2:SETUP MENU UPLOAD  
F3:FORMAT STICK  
The monitor screen display changes as follows.  
STICK TO ROM  
SETUP MENU DOWNLOAD  
STICK -> VTR  
File:  
DBMNRXXX.SUP  
EXECUTE - ON  
(Continued)  
Chapter 13 Setup Utility Menu Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-1  
13-1 Overview of Setup Utility Menu Functions  
5 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
ROM TO STICK  
SETUP MENU UPLOAD  
The selected file is downloaded.  
STICK <- VTR  
File:  
XXXXXXXX.XXX  
Note  
Do not do any of the following during the download.  
Doing so can corrupt the ROM software of this unit,  
making the unit unable to download normally.  
• Power the unit off.  
EXECUTE - ON  
• Remove or insert a memory stick.  
• Remove or load a cassette.  
5 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
The selected file is uploaded.  
To upload a file to a memory stick  
Proceed as follows.  
Note  
Do not do any of the following during the upload.  
Doing so can corrupt the ROM software of this unit,  
making the unit unable to download normally.  
• Power the unit off.  
• Remove or insert a memory stick.  
• Remove or load a cassette.  
1 Press the F2 (UPLOAD) button.  
The menu display changes, allowing you to  
execute the upload. The name of the currently  
selected file is flashing on the screen.  
To format a memory stick  
UPLOAD SETUP - DBMNRXXX.SUP  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
1 Press the F3 (FORMAT) button.  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
The menu display changes, allowing you to  
execute formatting.  
2 With the HOME button held down, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to select the file to  
upload.  
FORMAT - EXEC OFF  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
3 Rotate the MULTI CONTROL knob to display  
“EXEC OFF”.  
2 With the HOME button held down, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to switch EXEC OFF to  
EXEC ON.  
UPLOAD SETUP - EXEC OFF  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
FORMAT - EXEC ON  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
4 With the HOME button held down, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to switch EXEC OFF to  
EXEC ON.  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
The monitor screen display changes as follows.  
UPLOAD SETUP - EXEC ON  
SUP  
UTL  
SET  
F5  
EXIT  
F6  
FORMAT STICK  
to MS-DOS  
HOME  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
CAUTION!!  
All data in the MEMORY  
STICK will be deleted.  
When you want to redo a file selection, rotate the  
MULTI CONTROL knob to display the file name  
again, then go back to step 2.  
EXECUTE - ON  
The monitor screen display changes as follows.  
13-2  
Chapter 13 Setup Utility Menu Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Press the F5 (SET) button.  
Formatting is executed.  
If you are using a new memory stick, or if an error  
occurs during execution of F3: FORMAT STICK, use  
the sub mode to format the memory stick.  
Note  
All data in the memory stick is erased when you  
execute F3: FORMAT STICK.  
Chapter 13 Setup Utility Menu Functions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-3  
14-1 Removing a Cassette WhenTape Slack  
Occurs  
For details, refer to Section 1-17 in the Installation Manual.  
If tape slack occurs in the unit, it is necessary to  
remove the upper lid and sound baffle. This job should  
always be entrusted to a technician who has undergone  
service training.  
14-2 Head Cleaning  
To clean the video heads and audio heads, always use  
the special-purpose Sony BCT-HD12CL cleaning  
cassette.  
If you insert the cleaning cassette, it is automatically  
ejected after a head cleaning operation which lasts for  
5 seconds.  
Notes  
• When carrying out head cleaning without using the  
automatic cleaning function, be sure to eject the  
cleaning cassette after use in order not to damage the  
heads.  
• You cannot use the BCT-5CLN cleaning cassette.  
Follow the instructions with the cleaning cassette  
carefully, as inappropriate use of the cleaning cassette  
can damage the heads.  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-1  
14-5 Regular Checks  
14-3 Error Messages  
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnosis function,  
and if a problem is detected, displays an error message  
in the time data display and on the monitor.  
If an error message appears, contact your Sony service  
representative.  
Error message displays  
• To display error messages and codes superimposed  
on the monitor, set the CHARA in function menu  
page 4 to ON.  
• Some error messages have no associated error codes.  
In this case, they appear over the time data area.  
• Error messages with error codes are saved in non-  
volatile memory as an error log.  
• In some cases the error message is slightly different  
on the monitor and in the time data area.  
Indications in the time data display  
If a problem is detected, the ALARM indicator in the  
lower control panel lights, and an error message and  
error code appear in time data display area 1.  
Z
ALARM indicator  
Time data display area 1  
Indications on the monitor  
The error message and code also appear superimposed  
on a monitor connected to the COMPOSITE VIDEO  
OUTPUT 3 (SUPER) connector or SDI OUTPUT 3  
(SUPER) connector. Depending on the error code, an  
indication of the source of the problem may appear as  
a secondary error message.  
ERROR-01  
REEL TROUBLE-1  
14-2  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Message List  
Code  
Message  
Description  
–
NO COMMUNICATION  
Abnormality in the interface between the lower control panel and SYS CPU (SS-89  
board) has been detected in the lower control panel side.  
01  
02  
REEL TROUBLE  
REEL TROUBLE  
Tape slacking has been detected in the threading or unthreading operation.  
Tape slacking or tape breaking has been detected in the SEARCH, FF,or REW  
mode.  
03  
REEL TROUBLE  
Tape slacking,tape breaking,or supply or take-up reel locking has been detected in  
the REC or PLAY mode.  
04  
05  
REEL TROUBLE  
REEL TROUBLE  
A malfunctional tape transport speed has been detected in the FF or REW mode.  
A malfunctional operation of the supply or take-up reel has been detected during  
cassette insertion.  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
20  
21  
TAPE TENSION  
CAPSTAN TROUBLE  
DRUM TROUBLE  
TH/UNTH MOTOR  
THREADING  
Excessive tape tension has been detected in the REC or PLAY mode.  
Malfunction of capstan motor has been detected.  
Malfunction of drum motor has been detected.  
Malfunction of threading or unthreading operation has been detected.  
The tape top processing has not been completed in the threading mode.  
Dew condensation has been detected.  
HUMID  
TAPE T/E SENSOR  
TAPE TOP SENSOR  
TAPE END SENSOR  
FAN MOTOR  
The tape top and tape end have been detected simultaneously.  
Malfunction of tape top sensor has been detected.  
Malfunction of tape end sensor has been detected.  
Malfunction of cooling fan motor has been detected.  
CASS COMP MOTOR  
REEL SFT MOTOR  
Malfunction of cassette compartment-up or down operation has been detected.  
Malfunction of movement of the reel table corresponding to the cassette size has  
been detected.  
22  
23  
92  
93  
REEL POS SENSOR  
THRED RING SENS  
INTERNAL I/F1  
The L-cassette and S-cassette positions of the reel table have been detected  
simultaneously.  
The thread end and unthread end states of the threading ring have been detected  
simultaneously.  
Abnormality in the interface between SYS CPU (on SS-89 board) and other CPU/  
MPU has been detected.  
CPU INITIALIZE ERROR  
Abnormality in the interface between SV CPU (on SS-89 board) and DRUM CPU  
(on DR-414 board) has been detected.  
95  
96  
OTHERS NV-RAM ERROR  
SY NV-RAM ERROR  
Abnormality has been detected in the operation of an NV-RAM (on FP-133 board).  
Abnormality has been detected in the operation of an NV-RAM (on SS-89 board)  
for the system control system.  
97  
98  
99  
SV NV-RAM  
Abnormality has been detected in the operation of an NV-RAM (on DR-508 board)  
for the servo system.  
RF NV-RAM ERROR  
INTERNAL I/F 2  
Abnormality has been detected in the operation of an NV-RAM (on EQ-84 board)  
for the RF system.  
Abnormality in the interface between SYS CPU (on SS-89 board) and SERVO  
CPU (on SS-89 board) or MPU (on EQ-84 or DM-123 board) has been detected.  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-3  
14-5 Regular Checks  
14-4 Moisture Condensation  
When the unit is suddenly moved from a cold to a  
warm location, or used in a very humid place, moisture  
from the air can condense on the head-drum. This is  
called moisture condensation. If the tape is run in this  
state, it can adhere to the drum. To prevent such a  
condition from occurring, the unit is provided with a  
moisture detecting function.  
If this happens, the drum and capstan motors stop and  
the cassette is automatically ejected. Then, the durm  
starts to rotate again to dry its surface. In this state, the  
unit is not operable. When the moisture has  
evaporated, the error message disappears and the  
ALARM indicator goes off.  
If “ERR-10” appears and the ALARM indicator  
lights immediately after powering the unit on  
Leave the unit powered on and wait until the error  
message disappears and the indicator goes off.  
While the indicator is lit, you cannot insert a cassette.  
When the indicator goes off and the error message  
disappears, you can use the unit.  
If moisture condenses on the head-drum while the unit  
is in use, the ALARM indicator lights and “ERR-10”  
is displayed in the time data display area 1.  
Z
If you move the unit from a cold to a warm  
location  
Leave the unit powered off for about 10 minutes, in  
order to give the unit time to detect moisture  
condensation.  
ALARM indicator  
If moisture condensation occurs, “ERR-10”  
appears in time data display area 1.  
14-4  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-5 Regular Checks  
Displaying the hours meter  
14-5-1 Digital Hours Meter  
The hours meter can display seven items of  
information, in corresponding display modes, about  
the operational history of the unit. Use it as a guide in  
scheduling periodic maintenance.  
MULTI CONTROL knob  
Z
Display modes of the hours meter  
H01: OPERATION mode  
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been  
powered on in units of 1 hour.  
F6 (EXIT) button  
F5 (MENU) button  
H02: DRUM RUNNING mode  
Displays the total number of hours the drum has run  
with tape threaded in units of 1 hour.  
To display the hours meter  
H03: TAPE RUNNING mode  
Press the F5 (MENU) button, then turn the MULTI  
CONTROL knob to display the required item in the  
time data display.  
Displays the total number of hours the unit has been in  
fast forward, rewind, playback, search, recording or  
editing (except for stop and still) mode in units of 1  
hour.  
To exit from the hours meter  
Press the F6 (EXIT) button.  
H04: THREADING mode  
Displays the total number of times tape has been  
threaded in the unit.  
H12: DRUM RUNNING mode (resettable)  
Same as H02 except that the count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to  
replace the drum.  
H13: TAPE RUNNING mode (resettable)  
Same as H03 except that the count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to  
replace such components as fixed heads and pinch  
rollers.  
H14: THREADING mode (resettable)  
Same as H04 except that the count is resettable.  
This can be used as a guide in determining when to  
replace, for example, the threading motor.  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-5  
14-5 Regular Checks  
14-5-2 Maintenance Timings  
Use the following table as a timing guide for checking  
and replacing components of the unit.  
Note that an arrow in the table means that the  
component to be replaced is part of the assembly the  
arrow points to, which must be replaced as a whole.  
These intervals are not guaranteed lifetimes; the timing  
for replacing components depends on the particular  
conditions of use. In particular, depending on the  
degree of dirt contamination and abrasion, pinch  
rollers and cleaners may require replacement earlier  
than suggested by this table.  
For information on severe conditions (frequent threading/  
unthreading) or how to replace components, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual Volume 1.  
Guideline replacement intervals  
Digital hours meter indication  
Component  
R: Replace C: Check, and replace if necessary  
1000 hrs 2000 hrs 3000 hrs 4000 hrs 5000 hrs 6000 hrs  
(menu number in parenthesis)  
Upper drum  
Drum running time (H02)  
C
C
C
C(↓)  
C
Drum assembly  
Brush slip ring assembly  
Video head cleaner (roller)  
Pinch roller assembly  
Reel table assembly  
R
R
R
R(↑)  
R
Tape running time (H03)  
R
R (Replace at interval of  
4000 hours.)  
Pinch application  
assembly  
Tape running time (H03)  
Operation time (H01)  
R
Fan motor (card)  
Fan motor (MD)  
Power supply unit  
Replace after 40,000 hours  
Replace after 40,000 hours  
Replace after 40,000 hours  
14-6  
Chapter 14 Maintenance and Inspection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Betacam SX playback time (DVW-M2000/M2000P)  
194 minutes with BCT-194SXLA  
Analog Betacam playback time (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
General  
Recording format Digital Betacam  
Power requirements  
90 minutes with BCT-90MLA  
(525/60)  
108 minutes with BCT-90MLA  
(625/50)  
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption  
2.2 A (220 W) (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
2 A (200 W) (DVW-2000/2000P)  
Fast forward/ rewind time  
Approx. 3 minutes with BCT-  
184MXL  
Peak inrush current  
(1) Power ON, current probe method:  
54 A (240 V), 20 A (100 V)  
(2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in  
accordance with European  
standard EN55103-1: 16 A  
(230 V)  
Search speed  
Shuttle mode Digital Betacam playback: Still to  
approx. 50 times normal  
playback speed  
MPEG IMX playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): Still to approx.  
78 times normal playback speed  
Betacam SX playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): Still to approx.  
78 times normal playback speed  
Analog Betacam playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): Still to 35  
times normal playback speed  
(525/60)  
Operating temperature  
5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
20 to 90%  
DVW-M2000/M2000P: 23.5 kg  
(51 lb 12 oz)  
DVW-2000/2000P: 22 kg (48 lb  
8 oz)  
Humidity  
Mass  
Still to 42 times normal  
playback speed (625/50)  
Variable speed mode  
Dimensions (w/h/d)  
427 × 194 × 544 mm  
(16 7/8 × 7 3/4 × 21 1/2 inches)  
Digital Betacam playback: –1 to +3  
times normal playback speed  
MPEG IMX playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): –1 to +3 times  
normal playback speed  
Tape transport system  
Tape speed  
Digital Betacam: 96.7 mm/s  
Betacam SX playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): –1 to +2 times  
normal playback speed  
Analog Betacam playback (DVW-  
M2000/M2000P): –1 to +3 times  
normal playback speed  
MPEG IMX (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P):  
64.5 mm/s (525/60)  
53.8 mm/s (625/50)  
Betacam SX (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P): 59.6 mm/s  
Analog Betacam (DVW-M2000/  
M2000P):  
Jog mode  
Still to 1 times normal playback  
speed  
Servo lock time 0.5 (525/60)/0.7 (625/50) second or  
less (from standby on)  
118.6 mm/s (525/60)  
101.5 mm/s (625/50)  
Digital Betacam record/playback time  
124 minutes with BCT-D124L  
Load/unload time 6 seconds or less  
MPEG IMX playback time (DVW-M2000/M2000P)  
184 minutes with BCT-184MXL  
(525/60)  
220 minutes with BCT-184MXL  
(625/50)  
Appendix  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Analog composite input to analog composite  
output  
Recommended tapes  
Digital Betacam cassettes (S, L):  
Bandwidth (Y)  
S/N  
Differential gain 2% or less  
Differential phase 2° or less  
Y/C delay  
0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/ –2.0 dB  
56 dB or more  
BCT-D6/D12/D22/D32/D40  
BCT-D34L/D64L/D94L/D124L  
MPEG IMX cassettes (S, L) (for  
playback only on DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
20 ns or less  
K factor (2T pulse)  
Betacam SX cassettes (S, L) (for  
playback only on DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
1% or less  
Output SCH phase  
Based upon RS-170A/CCIR  
R.624-3  
(Adjustable by using the menu)  
Betacam SP cassettes (S, L) (for  
playback only on DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
Betacam cassettes (S, L) (for  
playback only on DVW-M2000/  
M2000P)  
Digitale audio system  
Digital audio (CH1 to CH4) signal format  
Sampling frequency  
Digital video system  
48 kHz (synchronized with video)  
Quantization  
Wow and flutter Below measurable level  
Headroom  
Emphasis  
20 bits/sample  
Digital video signal system  
Sampling frequency  
Y: 13.5 MHz  
20 dB (or 18 dB, selectable)  
T1= 50 µs, T2=15 µs (on/off  
selectable in recording mode)  
R–Y/B–Y: 6.75 MHz  
10 bits/sample  
Coefficient recording system  
Quantization  
Compression  
Analog output  
Frequency response  
Channel coding S-I-NRZI PR-IV  
Error correction Reed-Solomon code  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/ –1.0 dB  
(0 dB at 1 kHz)  
Analog component output  
Dynamic range  
Distortion  
95 dB or more (at 1 kHz, emphasis  
on)  
0.05% or less (at 1 kHz, emphasis  
on, reference level (+4 dBm))  
–80 dB or less (at 1 kHz, between  
any two channels)  
Bandwidth  
Y
0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
0 to 2.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
56 dB or more  
R–Y/ B–Y  
S/N  
K factor (2T pulse)  
Crosstalk  
1% or less  
Analog component input to analog  
component output  
Input A/D quantization  
10 bits/sample  
Analog audio system  
Analog audio (cue audio)  
Frequency response  
Bandwidth  
100 Hz to 12 kHz +3 dB/–3 dB  
Y
0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
S/N ratio  
45 dB or more (at 3% distorsion  
R–Y/ B–Y  
S/N  
K factor (2T pulse)  
0 to 2.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
56 dB or more  
level)  
Distortion  
2% or less (THD at 1 kHz reference  
level)  
1% or less  
LF non-linearity 3.0% or less  
Wow and flutter DVW-M2000/2000: 0.2% wrms or  
less  
DVW-M2000P/2000P: 0.2% wrms  
or less (DIN 45507 weighted)  
A-2  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MPEG IMX playback (DVW-M2000/M2000P)  
Video  
Bandwidth  
Y
DVW-M2000: 0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2 dB  
DVW-M2000P: 0 to 2.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2 dB  
R–Y/B–Y  
0 to 2.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–2dB  
56 dB or more  
S/N ratio  
K factor  
1% or less  
Digital Audio  
Frequency response (0 dB at 1 kHz)  
Dynamic range  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB  
95 dB (at 1 kHz, emphasis on) in 4-channel/24-bit mode  
90 dB (at 1 kHz, emphasis on) in 8-channel/16-bit mode  
Distortion (T.H.D at 1 kHz reference level) 0.05% rms (emphasis on)  
Wow and flutter Below measurable level  
Betacam SX playback (DVW-M2000/M2000P)  
Video  
Bandwidth  
Y
525-line mode: 0 to 4.5 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
625-line mode: 0 to 5.5 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
R–Y/B–Y  
0 to 2.0 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
56 dB or more  
S/N  
K factor (2T pulse)  
1% or less  
Audio  
Frequency response  
Dynamic range  
Distortion  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB (0 dB at 1 kHz)  
90 dB or more (at 1kHz, emphasis on)  
0,05% or less (at 1 kHz, emphasis on, reference level (+4 dBm))  
Analog Betacam playback (DVW-M2000)  
Video  
Metal tape  
Oxide tape  
Y
Bandwidth  
S/N  
30 Hz to 4.5 MHz +0.5 dB/ –4.0 dB  
30 Hz to 1.5 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
51 dB or more  
30 Hz to 4.1 MHz +0.5 dB/ –6.0 dB  
30 Hz to 1.5 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
48 dB or more  
R–Y/ B–Y  
Y
R–Y/ B–Y  
48 dB or more  
45 dB or more  
K factor (2T pulse)  
LF non-linearity  
2% or less  
3% or less  
Y
3% or less  
R–Y/ B–Y  
4% or less  
Y/C delay  
20 ns or less  
Appendix  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Audio  
Metal tape  
Oxide tape  
LNG Frequency response (at 10 dB  
below reference level a))  
50 Hz to 15 kHz +1.5 dB/ –2.0 dB  
50 Hz to 15 kHz +3.0 dB  
50 dB or more (Dolby NR off)  
2% or less  
S/N ratio (at 3% distortion level)  
72 dB or more  
1% or less  
Distortion (THD at 1 kHz  
reference level a))  
Wow and flutter  
0.1% rms or less  
AFM  
Frequency response (at  
reference level a))  
20 Hz to 20 kHz + 0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
S/N (at 3% distortion level)  
85 dB or more  
0.5% or less  
Distortion (THD at 1 kHz  
reference levela))  
a) Reference level: +4 dBm  
Analog Betacam playback (DVW-M2000P)  
Video  
Oxide tape  
Metal tape  
Y
25 Hz to 4.0 MHz +0.5 dB/–6.0 dB  
25 Hz to 1.5 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
46 dB or more  
Bandwidth  
S/N  
25 Hz to 5.5 MHz +0.5 dB/ –4.0 dB  
25 Hz to 2.0 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB  
48 dB or more  
R–Y/ B–Y  
Y
R–Y/ B–Y  
45 dB or more  
48 dB or more  
3% or less  
K factor (2T pulse)  
LF non-linearity  
2% or less  
Y
3% or less  
R–Y/ B–Y  
4% or less  
Y/C delay  
20 ns or less  
Audio  
Metal tape  
Oxide tape  
LNG Frequency response (at 20 dB  
below peak level a))  
50 Hz to 15 kHz +1.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
50 Hz to 15 kHz 3.0 dB  
62 dB or more  
2% or less  
S/N (at 3% distortion level) (CCIR 68 dB or more  
468-3 weighted)  
Distortion (THD at 1 kHz  
reference level b))  
1% or less  
Wow and flutter  
0.1% rms or less  
AFM  
Frequency response (at  
reference level a))  
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–2.0 dB  
S/N (at 3% distortion level)  
More than 72 dB (CCIR 468-3 weighted)  
Less than 0.5%  
Distortion (THD at 1 kHz  
reference level b))  
a) Peak level: +8 dB above reference level  
b) Reference level: +4 dBm  
A-4  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIME CODE IN XLR 3-pin, female (1)  
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ, balanced  
XLR 3-pin, female (1)  
Processor adjustment range  
CUE IN  
Video level  
Chroma level  
3 dB/ –∞ to +3 dB selectable  
3 dB/ –∞ to +3 dB selectable  
LOW OFF: –60 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH OFF: +4 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH ON: +4 dBm, 600 Ω  
termination, balanced  
Setup level (DVW-M2000/2000)  
30 IRE  
Black level (DVW-M2000P/2000P)  
210 mV  
Y/C delay  
100 ns (in analog Betacam  
playback)  
30°  
Sync: 15 µs  
SC: 200 ns  
Chroma phase  
System phase  
Output connectors  
SDI OUTPUT  
BNC (3 including 1 for character  
superimposition)  
Serial digital (270 Mbits/ s)  
SMPTE 259 M/ITU-R BT.656  
Input connectors  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT  
BNC (3 for 1 set)  
SDI INPUT  
BNC (1 with active through out)  
Serial digital (270 Mbits/s)  
SMPTE 259M/ITU-R BT.656  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, Sync negative  
R–Y/B–Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω, with  
100% color bar for DVW-  
M2000P/2000P and with 100%  
or 75% color bar selectable for  
DVW-M2000/2000  
REF. VIDEO INPUT  
BNC (2 in loop through  
connection)  
Black burst or composite sync  
0.3 Vp-p, 75Ω, sync negative  
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT  
BNC (3 including 1 for character  
superimposition)  
BNC (3 for 1 set)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, Sync negative  
R–Y/B–Y: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω, with  
100% color bar for DVW-  
M2000P/2000P and with 100%  
or 75% color bar selectable for  
DVW-M2000/2000  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative  
AUDIO OUTPUT CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4  
XLR 3-pin, male (4)  
+4 dBm at 600 Ω load, low  
impedance, balanced  
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) CH1/2, CH3/4, CH5/6,  
CH7/8 (CH5/6 and CH7/8 usable on DVW-2000/  
BNC (4)  
Complies with AES-3id-1995  
MONITOR OUTPUT (L/R)  
XLR 3-pin, male (2)  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT  
BNC (2 in loop through  
connection)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, Sync negative  
2000P only)  
AUDIO INPUT CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4  
XLR 3-pin, female (4)  
LOW OFF: –60 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH OFF: +4 dBu, high  
impedance, balanced  
+4 dBm at 600 Ω load, low  
impedance, balanced  
TIME CODE OUT  
PHONES  
XLR 3-pin, male (1)  
2.2 Vp-p, low impedance, balanced  
JM-60 stereo phone jack  
–∞ to –12 dBu at 8 Ω load,  
unbalanced  
XLR 3-pin, male (1)  
+4 dBm at 600 Ω load, low  
impedance, balanced  
HIGH ON: +4 dBm, 600 Ω  
termination, balanced  
AUDIO INPUT(AES/EBU) CH1/2, CH3/4  
BNC (2)  
CUE OUT  
Complies with AES-3id-1995  
Appendix  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
• For customers in European countries other than the  
United Kingdom  
Remote connectors  
Part No. 1-551-631-22  
Plug holder 3-613-640-01  
CONTROL PANEL  
10-pin (2), female  
Front/rear selectable  
REMOTE 1-IN (9P)  
D-sub 9-pin, female  
REMOTE 1-OUT (9P)  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference  
from portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other  
communications devices near this unit can result in  
misoperations and interference with audio and video  
signals.  
D-sub 9-pin, female  
D-sub 9-pin, male  
VIDEO CONTROL  
D-sub 15-pin, male (for optional  
BVR-50/50P)  
REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I/O (50P)  
50-pin, female  
RS-232C  
It is recommended that portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
Memory stick slot  
Memory stick (8 to 128MB)  
Accessories supplied  
PSW 4 × 16 screws for rack mounting (4)  
Operation Manual (English version ×1, Japanese  
version ×1)  
Installation Manual (English version ×1, Japanese  
version ×1)  
CD-ROM (1)  
Optional accessories  
BKDW-101 Remote Control Panel  
BKMW-102 Remote Control Unit  
BKMW-103 Control Panel Extension Kit  
BKMW-104 HD Upconverter Board  
RCC-5G 9-pin Remote Control Cable  
BVR-50/50P TBC Remote Control Unit  
RMM-131 Rack Mount Adaptor  
BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette Tape  
AC power cord  
• For customers in the U.S.A. and Canada  
Part No. 1-557-377-11  
Plug holder 3-613-640-01  
• For customers in the United Kingdom  
Part No. 1-777-823-12  
Plug holder 3-613-640-01  
A-6  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Connector panel 2-15  
recording 9-2  
Extended menu items 12-8  
External device connectors 2-17  
A
Continuous editing 5-13  
CONTROL PANEL connector 2-18  
Control panels 2-1  
CTL/TC (function menu) 11-3  
CUE button 2-11  
AC IN connector 2-17  
ALARM indicator 2-11  
Analog  
F
audio input/output section 2-15  
device connection 3-2  
video input/output section 2-16  
ASSEMBLE button 2-11  
Audio  
monitor signal output section 2-18  
selection function selector buttons 2-4  
setting display section 2-5  
signal selection buttons 2-5  
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons 2-12  
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors  
2-16  
AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors  
2-15  
AUDIO INPUT CH1 to CH4 and CUE IN  
LEVEL switches 2-15  
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU) connectors  
2-16  
AUDIO OUTPUT CH1 to CH4 connectors  
2-15  
AUTO EDIT button 2-13  
Auto Event Detector  
F FWD button 2-11  
Features 1-1  
CUE IN/OUT connectors 2-15, A-5  
525/625 indicator 2-7  
F1 to F6 buttons 2-6  
Format indicators 2-2, 2-7  
Function menu  
configuration 11-1  
item 11-3  
D
DELETE button 2-12  
DF (function menu) 11-4  
DF indicator 2-7  
Digital  
audio input/output section 2-16  
device connection 3-1  
hours meter 14-5  
signal input/output section 2-17  
Digital Betacam  
cassettes 3-10  
format 1-1  
tapes A-2  
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button 2-4  
DMC  
editing 5-11  
operation 2-6  
G
Ground terminal 2-17  
H
Head Cleaning 14-1  
Head configuration 1-1  
Headphones 2-2  
HOME button 2-6  
HUE (function menu) 11-5  
playback 4-12  
DMC EDIT button 2-12  
DOLBY (function menu) 11-7  
DOLBY NR indicator 2-8  
Drop frame  
mark 3-9  
mode 11-4  
I
output/recording 10-1  
overview 10-1  
IN/OUT buttons 2-12  
INPUT button 2-4  
Input signal selection 2-4  
INSERT buttons 2-11  
B
Basic menu items 12-5  
Betacam  
E
J
Cassette 3-10  
EDIT button 2-10  
Edit point 5-3  
JOG  
compatibility 1-2  
SX/SP cassette 3-10  
BLACK (function menu) 11-5  
button 2-9  
indicator 2-9  
Jog mode 4-8  
cue-up and preroll 5-7  
modifying and deleting 5-6  
setting buttons 2-12  
Editing  
C
K
C PHAS (function menu) 11-5  
CAPSTN (function menu) 11-7  
Capstan override function 4-9  
Cassettes 3-10  
automatic editing 5-1  
carrying out 5-8  
KEY INHI indicator 2-12  
KEY INHIBIT switch 2-14  
continuous editing 5-13  
control section 2-12  
cross-fade editing 12-14  
manual editing 5-14  
mode setting section 2-11  
preread editing 5-14  
quick editing 5-13  
selecting the editing mode 5-3  
special methods 5-13  
split editing 5-4  
CD-ROM manual 1-5  
L
CHANNEL CONDITION indicator 2-6  
CHARA (function menu) 11-7  
CH1 to CH4 buttons 2-11  
CHROMA (function menu) 11-5  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT  
connectors 2-16  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT  
connectors 2-16  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT connectors/  
75 Ω termination switch 2-16  
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT  
connectors 2-16  
CONFI (ON)/PREREAD indicators 2-8  
CONFI (function menu) 11-3  
CONFI playback 2-8  
Connections  
to analog devices 3-2  
Level meter 2-5  
LIST button 2-13  
Location and function of parts  
connector panel 2-15  
lower control panel 2-3  
switch panel 2-14  
upper control panel 2-2  
LTC  
standalone editing 5-14  
switch/menu settings 5-2  
E-E mode 2-5, 2-10  
EJECT button 2-2  
EMPHSS (function menu) 11-6  
ENTRY button 2-13  
Error messages 14-2  
Essence mark  
external sync 4-4  
M
Manual editing 5-14  
MARK button 2-13  
MEMORY indicator 2-12  
Memory stick 3-12  
output 9-2  
overview 9-1  
(Continued)  
to digital devices 3-1  
Index  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
MENU (function menu) 11-3  
Menu  
control buttons 2-6  
display 2-8  
operation 2-6, 6-2, 12-2  
MIXING button 2-4  
Moisture condensation 14-4  
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors 2-18  
MPEG IMX 1-1  
RECINH (function menu) 11-8  
REC/ERASE indicator 2-13  
RECORDER button 2-12  
Recording  
preparations 4-1  
procedure 4-5  
Superimposed character information 3-8  
SUPUTL (function menu) 11-8  
Switch panel 2-14  
SYNC (function menu) 11-6  
System configurations 1-4  
time code 4-2  
T
REF. VIDEO INPUT connectors/75Ω  
termination switch 2-16  
Reference signals  
T INFO (function menu) 11-6  
Tape transport control section 2-10  
TC button 2-11  
cassette 3-10  
compatibility 1-2  
connection 3-5  
TCG (function menu) 11-4  
TCGSET (function menu) 11-3  
TCR (function menu) 11-4  
TELE-F (function menu) 11-8  
Tele-File  
attribute data 7-11  
clip data 7-3  
format 7-12  
memory label 7-1  
overview 7-1  
resume 7-10  
undo 7-10  
Time Code 4-2  
TIME CODE IN connector 2-18  
Time code input/output section 2-18  
TIME CODE OUT connector 2-18  
Time data 3-8  
display 2-7  
TRIM buttons 2-12  
for the servo system 3-4  
Reference video signal generator 3-3  
Regular checks 14-5  
REMOTE buttons 2-2  
Remote control 2-2  
REMOTE 1-IN(9P) connector 2-18  
REMOTE 1-OUT(9P) connector 2-18  
REMOTE 2 PARALLEL I/O(50P)  
connector 2-17  
RESET button 2-8  
REVIEW button 2-13  
REW button 2-11  
RS-232C  
connector 2-18  
N
Non-drop frame  
mark 3-9  
mode 11-4  
O
Operation mode 3-9  
OPTION connector 2-18  
OUTREF (function menu) 11-7  
P
PANEL SELECT switch 2-14  
Parts replacement 14-6  
PB controls 2-6  
indicator 2-2  
RUN (function menu) 11-4  
PB/EE (function menu) 11-3  
PHONES jack/control 2-2  
PLAY button 2-11  
Playback  
capstan override 4-9  
dynamic motion control (DMC) 4-12  
jog mode 4-8  
S
SC (function menu) 11-6  
SDI INPUT connectors 2-17  
SDI OUTPUT connectors 2-17  
Search control section 2-8  
Search dial 2-9  
U
UMID (function menu) 11-8  
UMID  
display 8-4  
output 8-4  
overview 8-1  
recording 8-2  
Upper control panel 2-2  
User bit values 4-2  
normal 4-7  
shuttle mode 4-8  
SERVO indicator 2-11  
SETUP (function menu) 11-5  
Setup 3-7  
Setup utility menu  
overview 13-1  
memory stick data operations 13-1  
SHIFT indicator 2-8  
Shot data 6-7  
Shot mark function  
cueing up 6-6  
list operations 6-4  
operation menu 6-2  
operations 6-3  
overview 6-1  
reading 6-3  
speed indication 2-8  
variable mode 4-9  
PLAYER button 2-12  
Power supply section 2-17  
POWER switch 2-2  
Preparations  
V
for playback 4-6  
for recording 4-1  
VAR button 2-9  
Variable speed mode 4-9  
VIDEO (function menu) 11-5  
VIDEO button 2-11  
VIDEO CONTROL connector 2-18  
Video test signal (setup menu item 710)  
12-22  
VID.IN (function menu) 11-3  
VIN LV (function menu) 11-6  
VITC (function menu) 11-4  
VITC  
PREREAD (function menu) 11-8  
Preread editing 5-14  
PREROLL button 2-10  
PRESET/REGEN 11-4  
Preview 5-7  
PREVIEW button 2-13  
sorting 6-8  
writing 6-3  
Q
Shot mark section 2-13  
SHUTTLE button 2-9  
Shuttle mode 4-8  
SHUTTLE/VAR indicator 2-9  
Specifications A-1  
Standalone editing 5-14  
STANDBY button 2-10  
STOP button 2-11  
Quick Editing 5-13  
external sync 4-4  
field 3-9  
V.PROC (function menu) 11-5  
R
REC  
button 2-10  
controls 2-6  
Y
YC DLY (function menu) 11-5  
REC INHI indicator 2-10  
I-2  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The material contained in this manual consists of  
information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is  
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment  
described in this manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose  
other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment  
described in this manual without the express written  
permission of Sony Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVW-M2000/M2000P  
DVW-2000/2000P  
Sony Corporation  
B & P Company  
(SY,  
)
3-826-015-03(1)  
2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Seymour Duncan Spreader 67372 User Manual
Sharp Flat Panel Television 47SB57UT User Manual
Sharp MP3 Player DV NC150U User Manual
SIIG Computer Hardware 4110 User Manual
Sony Projection Television KP 46WT520 User Manual
Sony Cell Phone D2004 User Manual
Sony Computer Drive DW G120A User Manual
Sony Computer Monitor CPD G400P User Manual
Sony Digital Camera XCD SX910CR User Manual
SUPER MICRO Computer Server 6025B UR User Manual